Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Jeon Jungkook looked at himself bewildered in the mirror. He couldn't recognize the person in front. It was him, but it felt as if he was seeing a whole other, different person. 

"Wow! Do I look different..." he whispered to himself, filled with awe. He couldn't recognize himself in this new appearance, and he knew that no one he encountered would be able to identify him either. That was precisely the goal of what he was about to do—something he had been planning for weeks. 

Despite looking different and somewhat "new," he couldn't deny that he looked good- handsome, unlike his usual style. 

It felt strange; he rarely wore tight clothing or styled his hair this way and didn't often wear makeup. However, he couldn't deny that he liked seeing himself like this. It made him look like a carefree, confident young man who was secure in his body and abilities.

This starkly contrasted with the introverted, shy boy he usually portrayed to the world. The one who often kept to himself, feeling insecure and isolated, spent most of his time alone at home.

The boy who barely had any friends. 

He sighed. 

He takes a deep breath and turns around when he hears faint footsteps outside the dressing room. He has an idea of who it might be.

"Wow, you look so good and so different!" His best friend, Mingyu, compliments him as he enters and closes the door. He takes in Jungkook's appearance from head to toe. Mingyu had only helped with his friend's hairstyle; the rest of the transformation was Jungkook's.

"I know, seeing myself this way feels strange," Jungkook smiles. "I can't deny that I like it, though?" He tilts his head, questioning.

"I do, too! You look very handsome and sharp. I've seen you without glasses before, but I've never seen you wear anything other than oversized black and white clothes. The leather jacket, jeans, and makeup really pull the look together. The hairstyle too! You look like an idol, actually," Mingyu chuckles playfully, teasing his friend.

Jungkook snorts, "Thanks!"

"Are you ready to head out now?" he asked eagerly. "I came because they told me they would announce you in five minutes. The others and I are ready! I even have my mask with me!" He pointed to the mask in his hand, ready to join Jungkook in this venture. He didn't want his friend to face this alone.

"I guess so, but I'm feeling a bit uncertain," Jungkook replied hesitantly. "Is this really what I should be doing? Will it help me get out there and perform? Will it really work out?" He himself had brought up the idea of performing at the popular Club that everyone at his college talked about, where he would dress up as someone unrecognizable. This was meant to confront his fears, but he wondered if it was too soon.

"Oh, Kookie, don't do this now! Don't start having second thoughts!" his friend said, gripping his shoulders and meeting his gaze. "Yes, this is exactly what you should be doing! This will help you!"

"You can do this! I believe in you. You have talents that deserve to be seen, no matter how you choose to express them. I know this feels very scary for you, but remember why you are doing this: to face your fears! To become confident in your musical abilities and in yourself overall. This experience will help push away your insecurities and show you that what you love is also something you can achieve."

He looked at him with a comforting smile, which made the younger boy smile back.

"Also, you're wearing a mask, right? Half of your face will be covered, and you have different colored contact lenses. No one will recognize you; no one except us. Like you said, you look very unrecognizable, so go out there and be the person you've always wanted to be. Right now, you aren't the shy Jungkook; you are the Jungkook you strive to become," he added.

Jungkook nodded. He was right. He needed to do this, no matter what.

"You're right. Thank you..." He said with a smile.

"Anyway, let's head out now, okay? They'll announce you soon! Plus, I'll have your back on stage! Trust yourself, Kookie," the man said as he stood up and headed towards the door. Jungkook stood after him, looked at himself again, and then turned around completely.

"Let's go do this!... let's go test myself out," he says in a determined voice. Grabbing his mask and putting it on himself. 

"That's what I'm talking about! Let's go!" Mingyu smiles and gestures for him to leave. Jungkook nods, taking a deep breath and walking out there as confidently as he could. 

"Famous mysterious performer Golden Ian once again dazzles everyone with his performance at the Gold Heart Club and Karaoke Bar last weekend," Seokjin reads from his phone. This must be the tenth post he has seen on social media about this individual. Clearly, the performer is incredibly famous and has captured people's attention.

For the past four weeks, the male performer known as Golden Ian has been the talk of the campus. It began when he and six of his friends overheard classmates discussing an unknown young man who always performs wearing a mask at the Gold Heart Club and Bar. Since then, all they have heard is praise for this performer. His admiration and attention only intensified as he continued to perform at the Club.

Seokjin and his friends found the buzz intriguing and wanted to see the performer for themselves, but they haven't had the chance to do so yet.

"10:05. This boy better hurry up and stop making me wait," Jin muttered as he glanced at the time before setting his phone aside against the car door. He had been waiting to take Jungkook to school. The two usually had the exact start times during the week, so Jin would pick him up. Jungkook was typically punctual, but sometimes, he would make Jin wait, which Jin had grown accustomed to over their 11 years of friendship.

"Hey, Hyung! Finally here! Sorry, I had trouble finding my books and couldn't get ready on time!" Jungkook exclaimed, breathless, as he opened the car door and slid into the passenger seat.

"You know, with all the times you've made me wait, I could just stop taking you to school. Yet, here I am, always waiting for you. Always an excuse, huh, Jungkookie?" Jin replied, shaking his head as Jungkook rolled his eyes.

"Come on, don't be so dramatic, Jin hyung. I rarely make you wait! It's only been three times—well, four counting today. I'm usually on time! Plus, you offered to drive me! It wasn't my idea! So just cool it, old man!" Jungkook shot back, smirking as Jin widened his eyes at the last comment.

"I'm not an old man! I'm only 25 for crying out loud! Keep up that attitude, and I might just take back my offer and make you walk to school," Jin pretended to pout, feigning anger, but deep down, he didn't mean it.

"We both know you don't have the heart to do that, so why even bother saying it?" Jungkook replied, glancing out the window with a shake of his head. He then smirked again, clearly amused.

"Anyways, next Friday, I'm planning to go to Gold Heart Club with the others, and I was wondering if you're free that day to join us! It's been a while since you hung out with all six of us, and the guys really like you, even if you think you aren't worth being friends with. Not to mention, we haven't hung out in a while, too," Jin says, switching lanes and quickly glancing at Jungkook, who is deep in thought.

"Next Friday? I can't, hyung, sorry. I have a big test to study for that day, and I want to be well prepared," Jungkook frowns, feeling guilty for once again rejecting Jin's invitation to hang out.

"Really? Again? Come on, you always decline! You don't need to study, Kookie! I hope this isn't just an excuse because you think hanging out with me and the others will cause issues—it won't!" Jin says, a little upset, frowning as Jungkook winces at the tone.

"Plus, we haven't hung out in almost three weeks. If it's not school, it's your work. I rarely see you on campus. I just want to spend time with you, Kookie. Has work and school really been that bad? Is your boss giving you too much to handle? Should I talk to him?" he asks.

Jungkook quickly shakes his head. He sighs quietly, hating to see Jin upset, though he knows he has every right to feel that way. He has canceled their weekend hangouts for the past few weeks. It has been due to work, but Jin doesn't know that part of his work involves performing as Golden Ian. Jungkook doesn't feel ready to share this with Jin yet. It's not a matter of distrust; he just has his reasons, but he will tell him—eventually.

He could have taken a break from performing at the Club for the past month, but he can't deny that he enjoys it. He loves the confidence he's gaining from performing and seeing people's reactions. He has gotten so caught up in it that he unintentionally left Jin on the sidelines. But now, he recognizes the problem and feels guilty.

"No, Hyung. My boss is okay. He's been chill; you know him. Yes, it's been busier, and school has gotten a little hectic, too, but you don't need to talk to my boss," the younger man explains.

"I'm sorry for being busy and for skipping our hangouts. I'm not doing it intentionally. I hope you know that. I won't deny that I don't understand why the hyungs like hanging out with someone like me, but that's not the reason," he continues as Jin remains silent, listening intently.

"I'll see what I can do for the weekend, okay? I'll try to study more this week and see if I can hang out with all of you that day. Just know that I'm not doing this on purpose, all right? You know I love you, hyung," he says with a frown, hoping the older man understands.

"I know you do, Jungkook. I love you too; you're the younger brother I never had. I just miss being with you. I know I pick you up most of the time and that we see each other on campus, but not all the time—especially if it isn't the weekend. I've just been missing you, but I understand," Jin said, giving him a small smile to ensure they were okay.

"I'm sorry; I miss you too. I'll see what I can do, okay?" Jungkook replied as Jin nodded.

"I have a way you can make it up to me before the week ends!" Jin smirked as he entered the school parking lot. Jungkook looked at him curiously.

"What would that be?"

"You have to hang out with me today during your breaks! Our class times align today, so you must spend time with the boys and me. I want you to come this weekend too, and you can fully make it up to me then. But if you can't this weekend, you'll partially make it up to me today!" Jin smiled as Jungkook frowned a little.

"Don't give me that face! Jungkook, how many times do I have to keep reminding you that being with us doesn't change how people see us? And if it does, we don't care. I literally told you this minutes ago. Or is it that you truly don't like them and don't want to tell me? Be honest, Jungkook," Jin asked as he looked for a parking spot.

"No, I don't hate them! It's the opposite; I admire both you and the hyungs! They are some of the most talented and kind people I've ever met! The problem isn't with you guys; it's with me... you guys are too cool for me. Maybe you don't care what people say, but I still do. But I don't hate them," he replied, looking sad and wishing he didn't care about others' opinions.

Jin parked the car and sighed as he turned it off.

"I get it. I understand your struggles and insecurities, and I know why you have them. But don't you think it's time to start caring less about what others think? Jungkook, the only opinions that matter are mine and those of the people who love you. You need to focus on your own opinion—and the good ones at that. You are so talented and have a heart of gold. You're cool, too! I need you to truly start loving yourself, Kookie. You need to see how good and talented you are and how amazing of a person you are. Who cares what others think?" Jin turned to face him.

"I'm not saying you need to change everything or do it quickly. That's not how this works. I know it will be hard, but you need to try," he said, placing a hand on the youngest's shoulder. Jungkook nodded.

Jungkook nodded, realizing the oldest was right. If only he knew he was already trying to become his best self. "I know, hyung. You're right; I'll start trying," he smiled.

"Good! You'll start by hanging with us today. I won't accept no for an answer, plus you owe me. Okay?" Jin asked.

Jungkook sighed in defeat, nodding as Jin smiled, satisfied.

"Great, let's go!" Jin said. Both boys gathered their things and exited the car.

"Question, why do you guys want to go to the Club this weekend? Is it because of that new Golden Ian guy?" Jungkook asked, suddenly curious about why Jin and the hyungs wanted to go.

"Partly yes, mainly yes. We want to go out to have fun and drink to destress, but I won't deny that we mainly want to see Golden Ian perform. Everyone has been talking about him, and we want to see the hype for ourselves. I assume you haven't seen him perform, which is also why we wanted you to come," Jin explained as they walked together.

Jungkook nodded, feeling nervous at the thought that they would be coming to watch him perform that weekend. He wasn't sure how he would manage it.

"Wait, you sometimes help out, right? Have you seen him? Have you gotten any shifts?" Jin asked, recalling that though Jungkook had a small photography job, he also worked at the Club sometimes. What Jin didn't know was that it was becoming more frequent.

"I did. I helped out last weekend, which is why I canceled. I told you it was work. I didn't see him perform, though. I was busy with something else he wanted me to do, but the crowd was huge and really cool to see. So many people. Beomseok knows him, though," Jungkook replied, trying to sound as if he didn't know much about his alter ego.

"Well, if you come on Sunday, which I hope you will, I'm pretty positive we'll get to see how good Golden Ian is! I'm kind of excited, not gonna lie! The others are, too. We've seen some clips online, but everyone says it's different from seeing him live," Jin added as Jungkook nodded, pretending to act as normal as he could.

They chatted a bit more before Jin said goodbye.

"Anyway, I have to get to my lecture. I'll see you around, Kook!" Jin said, ruffling the boy's hair before heading in the opposite direction. Jungkook watched the older man leave and shook his head. He then walked to his lecture, noticing that almost everyone had already arrived.

"You guys went to see Ian? I heard he will be performing something even better or darker this weekend," a guy said to the girls.

"Rumor has it that the popular squad at school will be heading to watch him. I'm really curious about who he is and what the squad will think. It should be fun!" the guy added as the girls smiled and continued discussing the topic.

Jungkook had been so focused on what he was overhearing that he didn't notice when someone tall and handsome sat down next to him.

"Earth to Jungkook!" the person beside him said in a sweet, semi-deep voice, waving his hand up and down. Jungkook shook his head and turned to see his friend smiling at him, also shaking his head.

"Oh, sorry, Eunwoo. I got sidetracked," Jungkook replied, putting his phone away and looking at his friend, who rolled his eyes.

"Of course you were. I would get sidetracked too if people were gushing over me," the boy teased, and this time, Jungkook rolled his eyes in response.

"Please, Eunwoo, you act like people don't talk about how handsome or cute you are! I wasn't being distracted by what they were saying about him," Jungkook defended himself.

"Yeah, sure. I saw it the moment I came into the hall. You were on your phone and then stared off into space when you heard people talking about Ian. Great way to prove you weren't sidetracked. As for me, yes, people call me handsome, but they also judge my character. So, how can I zone out when people positively judge my appearance but not my personality? You forget that people see me as only semi-handsome. However, you might not get that attention at all. Still, the moment you transform into your other persona, people go crazy for you. They love your aura and personality. So they actually do love you; they just don't realize it because the mask covers a lot," Eunwoo argued.

"People like you too, even with the mask! Let's not forget you helped me with my first performance along with Mingyu," Jungkook said, adjusting his glasses. Eunwoo, like Mingyu, had been Jungkook's friends since their junior year of high school. He was also one of the people who helped Jungkook when he first performed as Ian.

"Hmm, but you are still the main character here, as you should be! Anyway, I heard that the hyungs are going to watch you this weekend. Is that true? Has Jin-hyung mentioned anything?" Eunwoo asked, leaning back in his chair after taking out all his stuff.

Jungkook sighed nervously. "Yeah, it's true. Jin-hyung told me about it today when he dropped me off. He and the other hyungs want to go check Ian out. Do you want to know what else he said? He wants me to join them and seems to be accepting no excuses. I have no idea what to do," Jungkook rubbed his temples in frustration. Eunwoo frowned.

"I told hyung that I would see what I could do, but there's no way I can cancel playing Golden Ian that night because they will come to see me. But I also can't keep ditching Jin-hyung either. I feel bad, plus he's already starting to get somewhat suspicious," he concluded.

"Oof, why don't you just tell him, Kookie? It's been a month; shouldn't that be long enough? He won't judge or criticize you for doing this whole thing. He would be nothing but understanding! He's like your second brother at this point. I don't get it!" Eunwoo exclaimed softly.

"I know, but I want to reveal it to him when I feel I have reached a good level of confidence. I don't plan to hide it from him forever. I know he's my brother and my family. I just want to show him without feeling scared. I want him to see my full potential. But I promise I will tell him, just not yet..." he replied, feeling guilty for not having the courage to share this with the older man.

"Jungkook, the fact that you are doing this to gain confidence would bring him joy and pride. He would be happy to see that you are trying. You wouldn't need to wait until you've reached your maximum confidence to show him the truth. He would be proud of you as you are," Eunwoo pointed out.

"I know. I want to prove it to myself. I'll think about it or give him hints, but just... just let me keep this a little longer," he pleaded.

"Fine, but just know that he would be proud of you, and he already is," Eunwoo concluded, and Jungkook nodded.

"As for what you will do this weekend, let's talk it out later with Mingyu. I'm sure we can come up with something," Eunwoo said as their professor walked into the room.

They turned their attention to the front as the professor greeted them.

After three grueling hours of lectures, both boys packed their things and exited the hall. "That lecture was boring as hell today. I can't wait until we finish this semester," Eunwoo said, shaking his head as they walked out.

"You're telling me," Jungkook replied.

"And yet I have another class in 10 minutes. I should start heading to it. What will you do? Mingyu is working on a project with his dance class, so none of us will be free to talk yet," Eunwoo frowned. It wasn't the first time Jungkook found himself alone during his gap period, but it was never intentional. He was only alone when his friends or Jin couldn't be available.

"I am actually going to hang out with Jin Hyung and the others. He texted me in the last five minutes of class where they would be and how I better see him there," he replied. 

"Wait, you're finally going to hang out with the hyungs? It's about damn time!" Eunwoo said with a smile.

"Yeah, mainly because Jin said I owe him, and I really do. But I hate that I'll draw attention by being with them. I have nothing against the hyungs; I admire them so much. It's just me—I don't feel cool enough, no matter what Jin or the others say," Jungkook replied, frowning as he grabbed the string of his backpack.

"Maybe I will be later. Don't give me a lecture on self-confidence because I know I need it; it's just not that easy. I still feel bad that they get questioned when they're with me. But I won't deny that it's fun hanging out with them," he added, smiling but then frowning again at his own lack of self-esteem.

Eunwoo shook his head. "I'll repeat what Jin hyung has told you many times, probably today. You shouldn't care about what others think. If they don't care, why should you? Yes, they are well-known on campus, but they have always been humble. If you're having fun, then do it more often. You won't have these moments once we graduate," Eunwoo said, gesturing to the people passing by as Jungkook nodded in agreement.

"I guess that's true," Jungkook acknowledged.

"Maybe I just need more time to feel confident. Anyway, I better go; I'm sure I'll get spammed with messages from Jin if I don't leave right now," Jungkook said, changing the subject and checking his phone for notifications.

"I better get to class too! I'll see you later, gguk!" Eunwoo patted him on the shoulder before leaving. Jungkook returned a small smile and headed in the direction where Jin had told him to go. He needed to walk fast; he knew Jin would give him an earful otherwise.

"Hello, everybody! We have arrived! Sorry if we are a little late; the meeting took longer than usual," Park Jimin and Kim Taehyung said as they entered the cafeteria together and spotted their friends.

"You guys are fine! We just got here six minutes ago!" Hoseok replied while eating with their other known friends from campus: Namjoon, Yoongi, and Jin.

"Gotcha! So how was the meeting? Did the members of the student body have anything to say?" Namjoon asked as he continued eating. It was known that both Taehyung and Jimin were involved with the student body, essentially acting as staff for the school. They had the potential to become actual student body executives, but they didn't want to draw too much attention to themselves or take on any more responsibilities.

"Yes! The student president thinks it would be a great idea to throw a party for students to relax and relieve some stress after the midterms. The school will provide a budget and plenty of fun!" Taehyung smiled.

"We also decided on a theme: a masquerade party! We just need to choose a date, time, and location," Jimin added, taking a moment to chew his food.

"Ooo, a party with a theme already? Sounds amazing! I'm sure many students will want to attend, especially since the school is covering the budget and securing the location. I absolutely love the idea; we definitely need to unwind and have some fun!" Hoseok commented with a big smile.

"Yeah, it sounds cool! Have you guys talked to any performers, or are you just planning to have a DJ? Or have you not gotten to that part yet?" Yoongi asked curiously, hoping they would consider some live performances.

"We actually did! We want to have some students from the performing arts department perform. We'll have a DJ as well, but it would be fun to feature performances from our peers!" Taehyung said, suddenly looking down in guilt as the others noticed his change in demeanor.

"But? What did you involve us in, Kim Taehyung?!" Jin asked, almost whining.

"I may have suggested that we could perform!" Taehyung admitted. "I thought it would be fun, and that's part of what we're training for in this department. However, I should have talked to you all first. The other members are already really excited and hope it happens."

"But we understand if you don't want to do it," Jimin clarified. "Tae and I just volunteered because we haven't performed together in a while, and like he said, it will be fun!" The boys had a history of performing together, and audiences loved their shows. They also enjoyed performing, but it had been a while since they did so.

"I'm okay with it," Namjoon said.

"Me too," Yoongi added.

"I'm on board as well!" Hoseok chimed in.

"I have no issues, but the problem is that we stopped performing because it felt like something was missing or not as exciting as before. That's why we took a break, remember?" Jin pointed out. While the boys loved going out to perform at various events, they lost motivation when they felt that something was off.

"That's why we offered to perform again. Maybe now that we've had a break, we won't feel that way anymore. Besides, it's good to see how we perform after a while—maybe all we needed was some rest," Taehyung replied.

"Could be. We can discuss this more later, at least until we know the date," Yoongi concluded, and the others agreed. It seemed best to revisit the topic once they had more details.

Suddenly, Jin received a message and smiled. "Oh yeah, we will have a guest joining us shortly, in just a few minutes!" he said, grinning as he put his phone down.

The boys perked up and looked at Jin with some hope. "Wait, is that guest Jungkookie?!" Hoseok asked excitedly. It had been a while since they had talked to the younger man or hung out with him, and they all truly loved spending time with Jungkook.

They first met the youngest when he started college, and Jin introduced him. At first, Jungkook was very shy around them, but the boys quickly realized they wanted to include him in their group. They had made efforts to get him to hang out more, but he continued to be shy. Over time, though, his shyness had lessened a little.

It was a shame that Jungkook was so shy that he rarely spent time with them, and it was also unfortunate that he thought he would ruin their image when, in reality, they didn't care about that.

"Yup! I somehow managed to convince him to join us today! Well, he really owes me after blowing me off for the past month with... I don't even know what! He says it's work and school, which is believable, I guess, but I don't know," Jin replied, taking a sip of the juice in front of him.

"Nice! I wish he would hang out with us more. I hate that he feels out of place with us because of a popularity that we didn't even seek. I wish he didn't feel so insecure. We don't care if people judge," Taehyung frowned, voicing what the others felt. They all wanted Jungkook to feel more confident among them and tried their best to treat him as an equal.

"It's hard when you have insecurities, and I understand him. I can see how our popularity could be intimidating, but I do wish we could see more of him! He fits in very well with us," Yoongi added.

"I know, guys, but trust me, I'll get him to join us more. It's a work in progress right now—just baby steps!" Jin replied, smiling as he saw Jungkook shyly approaching their table in the canteen.

"Oh, he's here! Jungkookie!" Jimin waved. Jungkook smiled and approached their table, bowing to all of them at once.

"Hello, hyungs! Sorry I took a while; my professor ran the presentation longer than usual. I hope I didn't keep you guys waiting too long," Jungkook said with a smile as he sat next to Jin and Yoongi.

"It's okay, Jungkookie! We're just happy that you could join us today! How are classes?" Namjoon asked, returning the smile.

"They've been okay. A little boring. How about all of you?" Jungkook replied as he took out some packed lunch. Seeing how some people were eyeing them, he felt a bit tense, but he tried to shake it off.

"Mine was okay, just very lecture heavy," Jin replies, putting some food on Jungkook's plate that he didn't want. 

"It's been just okay. Nothing interesting," Namjoon shrugs. 

"Mine was good! It was all dance and musical production, so it was fun," Hobi answered enthusiastically, showing how much he liked his major. Jungkook's eyes shined bright. He enjoyed hearing about the dance courses and the way the classes run. He also envied those who were able to take the course. 

"Mine was also good. I had the last one with Hobi!" Thank you for asking. By the way, Jungkook-ah!" Yoongi adds in. 

"Tae and I had one class, and then we went to our student council meeting! It was exciting! We actually just talked to the guys about it. The school is thinking of having a masquerade theme party. Fully funded by the school, well, it will happen!" Jimin answered as Jungkook's eyes widened. 

"Really? A party? That sounds fun. Are you guys going to perform?" Jungkook asked. He knew that they were always asked to perform and hype up any event they went to. He wondered why they stopped. Yes, Jin had explained to him, but he thought they would get back to it by now. 

""We don't know yet. That's something we need to think about. We want to, but it's a bit stressful to wonder if we'll continue feeling like something is missing or if we need to change," Jin said with a pout.

"Missing? But you guys are all amazing and talented! How could anything be missing?" Jungkook asked, confused. He couldn't understand why they felt this way when they were such a strong group. He believed they were perfect just the way they were.

"Thanks, Jungkookie, but we haven't felt like we've been at our best for a while, as you say. That said, it doesn't hurt to try," Jimin replied, and Jungkook nodded, looking concerned.

"Hey, Jungkook... do you know how to dance or sing? Maybe you are what we're missing! Perhaps we actually need another person to feel complete! If you do, you'd fit right in, and we'd have your back!" Yoongi suggested, his eyes filled with hope.

Jungkook's eyes widened at the proposal. He could dance and sing a little but wasn't ready to perform as himself. The idea of performing with them and risking messing up frightened him.

"He does know a little, and I think he could be perfect with some practice! It's actually a good idea, Yoongi," Jin said, brightening at the thought, while Jungkook shook his head shyly, his cheeks turning red.

"No, no, no. I appreciate the offer and that you think I could be talented, but I'd just mess you guys up. I'm not that good. As Jin hyung said, I only know a little. Plus, I'm really shy. I would ruin everything," he replied, gesturing with his hands in a way that indicated refusal, then putting them down.

"You wouldn't mess up, Kookie! I'm sure you'd be amazing with some practice and time! However, we also don't want to pressure you," Taehyung said, placing a hand on his shoulder, but Jungkook gave them a guilty look.

"Yeah! You wouldn't be bad at all, Kookie! But if you're not comfortable, we understand. Maybe you might change your mind in the future, " Hoseok smiled sweetly.

"I really hope so. He has the potential," Jin said, gently caressing the back of Jungkook's head.

"Another idea is for some of us to perform before or after Golden Ian takes the stage at the Club! We could test the waters there!" Namjoon proposed. Jungkook did his best to remain calm at the thought of them coming to see him this weekend.

"That could work! Let's perform before Golden Ian. I don't want to have to prepare for anything after seeing him perform. I have a feeling we'd lose our concentration after that. Everyone talks about how great he is, and the videos prove it," Hoseok added. At the same time, Jungkook continued to try to act normal, even though he was freaking out inside at the idea of their visit.

"Did you guys see the last show he did this weekend? Everyone's talking about it! I can't wait to see it in person," Jimin commented excitedly, fascinated by what he had seen in the videos on social media.

"By the way, has anyone figured out who he is?" Yoongi asked, and they all exchanged curious glances.

"I don't think so. People seem to believe he must be a student here!" Taehyung chimed in.

"Really? But I feel like someone would have found out who he is if that were true. Maybe he's from another campus? Or perhaps he doesn't even go to school and is a professional performer," Jin replied.

"Who knows, have you seen Golden Ian yet, Jungkookie? If so, do you want to come with us this weekend?" Yoongi asked the younger one, who finally froze a little. 

"I already asked him to come, but Jungkookie here says he needs to study for an important exam. So who knows if he will go with us, though I hope he does? Maybe you all can convince him for me!" Jin answers for him as Jungkook looks at him, annoyed. 

He could gently reject Jin because he is comfortable doing so, but he can't seem to do so with the rest. He already feels bad about Jin, and saying no to them would make him feel even worse, but he can't say anything yet. He also can't ditch the show. 

"Yeah, come on, Kookie! Come with us! You'll have fun! You'll see some of us perform, and then we'll see Golden Ian! It'll be a perfect time! Also, you're smart. We're sure you can ace that test, whatever it is," Jimin encouraged.

Jin smiled, clearly pleased.

"Yeah, Jungkook! Don't worry about what people think; we don't care!" Taehyung added.

"I, um... I'll try to come because it's not just studying; I might be needed for work too, possibly on a call. I'll try to rearrange it and get back to you. How does that sound?" he asked, rubbing his nape and biting his lip in worry.

"You aren't saying no directly anymore, so that's a win for me! What about you guys?" Jin asked, putting his arm around Jungkook, who briefly shot him an irritated look.

"Sounds good to us! We don't want to force you, but if you come, just know we'll be happy to have your company!" Namjoon smiled at him.

"You didn't answer if you've seen Golden Ian, by the way. Have you? What do you think of him?" Hoseok changed the topic.

"Uhm, I haven't seen him yet. But from what I've seen in the videos on social media... he's terrific. He's talented," he replied, finding it strange that he was complimenting himself.

"I have confirmed, though, that he comes to our campus. He's a student, too, just really good at keeping his identity secret and not dropping hints. At least that's what my other boss said when I filled in at the Club," he revealed unexpectedly, feeling guilty for deceiving them.

"Wait, really? Is this confirmed information?" Yoongi asked in disbelief. The others wore similar expressions.

"Yeah, but it's best if you don't tell anyone because it seems Golden Ian really wants to keep it a secret," he urged. He didn't want anyone else to know that it was someone from school, much less that it was him.

"Don't worry, we won't! But wow, thanks for the inside info, Kookie! I wonder who it is, then. It must be someone unexpected if he wants to keep it a secret," Taehyung speculated.

"Or maybe he's semi-popular and doesn't want to attract more attention than necessary, so he hides," Jimin added.

Jungkook simply shrugged. He had shared enough.

"That wouldn't make sense. I think it's someone completely unexpected or someone nobody knows at all. But gosh, that makes things more mysterious," Jin smiled.

"It makes us all even more excited for Friday! I really hope you can come, Jungkook. That way, we all see Golden Ian together for the first time," Jimin said, placing a hand on his shoulder.

Jungkook gave them a tight smile. "I'll try my best to see what I can do," he said, though deep down, he felt overwhelmed and uncertain.

He needed to figure something out very quickly.

"Okay, let me get this straight. You decided to keep the truth from Jin. Now, because you've held back the truth and skipped out on the past few weekends, he wants you to join him this weekend to see yourself perform, but he doesn't know it's you. You don't want to make him or the hyungs feel worse, and you're trying to find a way to go while still hanging out with them?" Mingyu asked as he gathered the details from Jungkook and Eunwoo.

The three of them had met after school to discuss the situation.

"Basically, I told him I might try to join, but since the other hyungs are hoping to meet up, I can't promise I'll fully go with them. I already feel bad enough lying to them and being shy about being with myself because of my insecurities," Jungkook frowned, feeling frustrated with himself.

"I think I might have an idea for you," Mingyu said after confirming all the details with his friend.

"You can say you need to work your shift but were given permission to leave earlier than usual. Don't give them a specific time; just tell them you'll join them a little late. In reality, you'll already be there getting ready to perform," Mingyu suggested.

Jungkook's frown turned into curiosity as he considered the plan. "Oh, and after the show, I could change quickly and pretend that I arrived late and unfortunately missed seeing Golden Ian," Jungkook added excitedly as they put the plan together.

"That actually sounds like a plan that would work because most of the time, people just party with the regular DJ after you or others finish performing, so you'd be hanging with them the rest of the time," Eunwoo smiles after getting the plan. 

"Exactly! I'm a genius! What would you do without me, Kookie?" Mingyu exclaimed, patting his friend's shoulder with a smile of pride.

"Okay, now what do you plan to do for the performance? It has to be impressive if you want to wow them," Eunwoo said, crossing his arms over his chest.

Jungkook nodded, pondering what to do until he finally found the perfect theme for the performance.

"I think I have it in mind. Just one question, though?" he asked with a smirk.

"And that would be what?" Mingyu inquired.

"How would you feel about being my backup dancers for most of the performance?" Jungkook suggested.

The two friends exchanged glances. It wasn't a bad idea.

"It will be fun!" Jungkook added enthusiastically.

"Okay, fine, why not?" they both replied.

"Great! This will be one unforgettable performance!"

-

Chapter Text

"You are going to wear this and this!" The oldest placed pieces of clothing on the younger one's bed with a happy expression.

Since he told the oldest that he would join him and the others at the club, Jin felt immensely excited about it. So much so that he even took the younger one shopping for new clothes that morning.

"Also, let us see your big eyes and remove the glasses for tonight. I know your eyesight isn't so bad anymore, and soon you won't need them," he said as he carefully removed Jungkook's glasses and set them on his table.

To the oldest brother, this one-night hangout felt like a significant event, which Jungkook didn't quite understand. While he knew it was a club, and people often dressed up on weekend nights, he didn't see the need for all the extra fuss. It would only draw attention to him, and he still wasn't comfortable with that.

"I know how to style myself, Hyung! You didn't need to buy these clothes for me just for tonight. Plus, I'm joining you guys a little later than planned; nobody will notice. It's probably better that they don't," he frowned as he ran his hand through his freshly cut hair. That was another thing Jin had taken him to do.

However, he hadn't complained much about the haircut. It wasn't too long, but his hair was nearing mid-cheek. He wouldn't deny that he had thought about cutting it for a while, so maybe Jin did him a favor by getting it done earlier.

It would also help him style it faster when he became Golden Ian.

"Yes, but it's still a club, and people who attend clubs dress up! It's a karaoke place where you can eat and hang out, too, but it's primarily a club at night! I just want you to dress the part! Also, don't come here talking about styles," Jin crossed his arms. "You don't know how to style yourself, or else I wouldn't always see you in hoodies or shirts that are way too big for you! I know you have insecurities, but you could still dress well without exposing too much!" The oldest brother argued back while the younger one rolled his eyes.

"Anyways, it's too bad you can't join us from the beginning, but I'm happy you'll be there at some point. You better not leave us hanging, Jeon Jungkook!" Seokjin warned, pointing a finger. The younger man shook his head.

"I won't! I promised, and you know my word is good as gold!" he replied, smiling.

"Are you all excited to finally see Golden Ian today? Are you expecting anything from him?" Jungkook asked, trying to sound neutral and curious. He wanted to confirm what Jin and the other hyungs hoped to see.

"Yup! Mainly, I just want to see how good he is. I'm expecting a solid, impactful performance—though not too impactful since he isn't an idol or anything, just enough to understand the hype," Jin said, putting the last piece of Jungkook's planned outfit on the bed.

"You think he's overhyped?" Jungkook asked. He hoped that wouldn't be the case; he didn't want to feel insecure three hours before his performance.

"No, not at all. I've seen the videos, and I understand the hype. I want to experience it live—being there and watching him. I'm curious to see what he will pull off!" Jin sat down next to Jungkook and smiled.

"What about you guys? Will you perform? I've seen you practicing this week!" Jungkook asked. The hyungs had been rehearsing all week, wanting to test how they felt about performing on stage again as a group. They were trying to determine if something was genuinely off or just fatigue or burnout.

"Yes, we will perform a cover of a song. Jimin and Hobi made the choreography. I'm excited to test the waters again, but honestly, I already know what conclusion we'll reach," the oldest brother said, looking down with a slight frown.

"Why the frown? What do you think the answer will be?" Jungkook asked, concerned about seeing Jin in this way.

Jin sighed.

"Something still feels off. Something is missing, and I can't quite put my finger on it! We feel more energetic, but there still isn't a wow factor, or at least it hasn't shown up lately," he admits. Although he expresses these thoughts as his own, deep down, he knows the others share similar feelings.

"Still?" the youngest asks.

Jin nods.

"I'm hoping we find that wow factor on stage today. If not, who knows what will happen. I won't worry too much since we'll also have fun. But we'll try to see if everything changes once we're in front of people, so you could say we're looking forward to two things tonight," he says as he gets up from the bed.

"I'm sure you guys will find that wow factor on stage. I can't imagine what could be missing for you, given how talented you are! But if you still don't find it, I believe you will eventually. There's always a solution, right?" Jungkook offers him some hope and cheer.

"Well, that's what you tell me," Jin replies as he crosses his arms.

"True! I guess we'll see! Anyway, it's getting late! I still need to get ready!" Jin says while checking his watch.

"I'll head out now, but please call me when you arrive at the club! And I hope you get there before Golden Ian! Also, wear the clothes I put on your bed!" he warns as he gathers his things to leave.

Jungkook chuckles, knowing that Jin would remind him of everything he needed to do.

"I promise, Hyung!" he smiles. He intends to keep his promise, though he knows there's one promise he'll have to break simply because he can't wish for it yet.

"Hope you stay true to that! Anyway, see you, Kookie!" Jin gives him a salute as he leaves.

The youngest shakes his head, watching him go. He then checks his watch and realizes he needs to start getting ready to head to the club and practice. Things were about to get interesting, but he felt very nervous.

"Here we are! Wow, look at how many people are already here. We're lucky we found parking!" Hoseok exclaimed as they stood in front of the crowded club. He glanced back at his five friends, who nodded in agreement.

Many students from campus filled the area, and a few didn't seem to be from SNU, but most appeared to be fellow students. It was evident that some attention shifted toward them the moment they arrived.

"Is it always this crowded, or does Golden Ian draw that many people with his performances?" Taehyung asked, observing the crowd entering the club.

"Definitely! Though today seems busier than usual—especially because you guys are here!" a voice came behind them. They turned and smiled.

"Sungwoon! You come to the club? Have you seen Golden Ian before?" Jimin inquired, noticing one of his friends smiling and bowing at them. Yoongi had introduced Sungwoon, but over time, he had grown close to all of them, especially Jimin. He was a dance major.

"Yeah! He's so cool to watch! I don't always come here, but I decided to come today because I figured he might do something different with you guys here," Sungwoon replied, slipping his hands into his pockets.

"I'm not sure if he goes to SNU, but I have this feeling! Anyway, some people are here to see you and him," he added.

"Wow, he must be that good," Jin commented.

"He is! Trust me, you'll see! Anyway, you all should head inside! I have to meet someone for a meeting, but I'll see you guys around!" He patted them on the back and walked in.

"Guess we should go in and see what all the fuss is about!" Yoongi said, raising an eyebrow and gesturing for everyone to follow.

As they entered, they first noticed the white chairs and tables in the center, with a bar featuring modern stools. The walls were neither dark nor light; the venue had LED screens, neon lights, and glow-in-the-dark elements. The stage was large, with couches for a more comfortable setting.

It had been a while since they had last visited.

"Let's sit over there! It's near the stage and away from the usual spots!" Taehyung pointed, leading them to a more inviting area.

They all settled down together and picked up the menus on the tables. After studying the options, they placed their orders when a server came to take them.

"The club seems to have remodeled some things! It looks different from what we saw three months ago!" Yoongi remarked, taking in the modern and stylish renovations.

"Right? It looks better!" Jimin agreed.

"So, is Jungkookie coming tonight, or was he held back?" Hoseok asked curiously. They were excited when Jin mentioned that Jungkook would join them, although he would arrive later.

"He is! I arranged everything for him to get ready, and he promised to be here once he's finished! If not, don't worry; I have a way to collect it! But he'll come!" Jin replied, sounding somewhat confident.

He knew the younger would never blow them off after agreeing to hang out, but he was concerned that Jungkook might feel out of place or have last-minute jitters.

"I hope he makes it! It was really fun hanging out with him during lunch!" Namjoon remarked, taking a big gulp from his beer as it was placed in front of him.

"Ah, that's some good stuff!" he said, setting the cup down.

"Me too! I really wanted him to see our performance! Speaking of which, are you guys ready to test the waters today?" Jimin asked, picking up his own drink.

"Hmmm, somewhat! I really hope we feel a surge of adrenaline tonight once we get on stage! I want us to perform at the party, but if we still feel stuck and like something is missing, we might need to rethink our approach," Yoongi said, frowning. They were all excited to perform but also apprehensive.

"Are we performing before someone else or what?" Hoseok inquired.

"We're performing before Golden Ian. No one wants to sign up to perform after him because everyone just wants to focus on him. But since we're well-known at school, they decided to have us two perform," Namjoon explained. He had arranged their performance.

"I was thinking, if we don't feel any different from our previous performances, maybe we could feel some change at the party by adding another person. I think we're missing someone when we perform," Taehyung began, presenting his idea without waiting for permission but catching the interest of the others.

"So my idea is that thanks to our Jungkookie, we know that Golden Ian is from our school, right?" he asked. The boys nodded, somewhat understanding what he was getting at.

"If we like Golden Ian's way of performing, we should ask him to perform with us at the party! Imagine how great it would be to combine his skills with ours and feel that energy we used to have! He might say no, but it's worth a shot, don't you think?" he suggested, sipping his drink as he relaxed back in his seat.

"Actually, that could work! We'd blow people away! But there's a chance he might disagree," Jimin replied.

"True, but it's worth trying if we appreciate his skills. Maybe he'll say yes! We could go talk to him after his performance," Jin added. He didn't think it was such a bad idea... he felt that Golden Ian would fit in nicely with them.

"Then it's settled! We'll go talk to him after we see him perform. But I think we should start heading backstage soon. Our performance time is in 20 minutes, and it's always better if we warm up," Yoongi said, glancing at his watch and setting his drink on the table.

"Yup, let's go!" Hoseok exclaimed, getting up at the same time as everyone else to get ready.

"Just this last one," Jungkook said quietly as he put in the colored contact lens, immediately blinking afterward to secure it. He smudged the eyeshadow a little more before setting down the applicator and looking at himself in the mirror.

He patted his hair to ensure it was fully tamed, then checked himself out from head to toe. It still amazed him how well and somewhat different he looked when he dressed up as Ian.

Today felt especially significant because it was the first time he had changed his appearance a bit more. He usually parts his hair, but since it was short and he wanted to be a little more unrecognizable this time, he had styled it slicked back.

"Damn, look at you! You look so handsome. Seeing you dressed up like a fancy idol always amazes me. You look the same, but at the same time, so different!" Eunwoo said as he entered, Mingyu by his side. They both dressed similarly to Jungkook since they would perform with him.

"Ooh, I see you changed the color of the contact lens a bit, huh?" Mingyu remarked, looking into Jungkook's eyes. Jungkook smirked and nodded in response.

"I did. With Jin and the hyungs here, I had to look unrecognizable. Of course, it's not a huge change. I'm just wearing more formal, stylish clothes, some makeup, and a slightly different hairstyle," he said, taking a nervous breath.

He had been nervous all week about performing this weekend because the hyungs would be present, but his anxiety grew worse now that he was just an hour away from going on stage.

"I'm so nervous. I hope I don't mess it up and ruin everything I've worked for," he said, pouting slightly. His friends exchanged concerned glances and shook their heads.

"Do you think this Michael Jackson theme I chose will be good? The song I sing at the end isn't tied to the theme, but it showcases my vocals well. Should I change it?" he asked anxiously.

"No, don't! It's perfectly fine that the last song doesn't fit the theme, Jungkook! We know you're nervous, but you're going to crush this! We'll be there on stage with you! I promise you won't mess up, and nobody will even recognize you," Mingyu said, sitting next to Jungkook and rubbing his back to comfort him.

"Yeah, everything will go well! This will be your best show yet! Just watch!" Eunwoo smiled.

"Thanks again for agreeing to perform with me, by the way! I also need to thank Jaehyun for his help now that he's back from his trip! Where is he, by the way?" Jungkook asked. Jaehyun was another friend in their group. He often hung out with them, but he was also sometimes very busy with his acting major, so it was mostly the three of them.

"He's helping the background dancers! He said he'd meet us backstage. Also, no need to thank us, gguk! Anything for you," Eunwoo said, squeezing Jungkook's shoulder.

"Did you bring the different clothes for when we hang out with the hyungs afterward?" Mingyu asked.

Jungkook nodded.

"I did! I'll try my best to change after I perform so they don't get the wrong idea!" he replied.

He had brought the clothes Jin picked out for him in a big bag, folded nicely to prevent wrinkling.

Jungkook still felt guilty that he didn't have the courage to tell Jin the truth, but he wanted to wait longer.

"Sounds good! Leave the bag in our dressing room so I can take it home afterward. Anyway, the hyungs are about to perform, huh? Tonight is a big night because both you and they are going to perform," Eunwoo added, adjusting the lace of his shoe.

"I caught a glimpse of the crowd outside, and wow, I think this may be the biggest turnout yet, gguk!" Mingyu said, his tone showing surprise.

"Wait, how many people?" the man of the night asked worriedly. He had performed in front of big crowds before and expected this one to be larger, but he didn't know how it compared to other times.

"A lot! But don't worry; you'll do great, and no one will surely recognize you! You can go see when the hyungs are performing," Eunwoo reassured Jungkook, not wanting him to panic.

"Knowing that no one can recognize me is exactly why I do this and why I don't just go home and hide under the covers," he said, biting his lip as his nerves increased slightly.

He then looked at the time. "Oh, the hyungs may start soon. I want to watch them. Should we go? I need to check the crowd, too." He stood up, searching for his mask. He had two: one that covered the top half of his face and one that covered the bottom half.

Today, he would wear the mask that covered the bottom half.

"Yeah, let's go! We are right after them, too," Mingyu said, getting up and putting on his mask. Eunwoo followed suit.

"Okay, I'm ready. Let's go," Jungkook stated as he put on his sunglasses. That was part of the show. He also grabbed his hat, which he would later lose.

"Hey, guys! The others are about to start. Are you ready? Damn, Jungkook, you look really good!" Jaehyun said, walking in, opening the door, and smiling when he saw Jungkook.

"I am. Let's go!" Jungkook signaled. They all nodded and headed out together, with Jungkook closing the dressing room door last. He walked behind the stage and saw his hyungs getting into position.

He stayed where no one could see him or his friends.

"I hope you guys find the synergy back after this performance..." he whispered as he heard the MC introducing them and the first beat of the song drop.

It wasn't their own song; they were performing a cover of a K-pop group, specifically Super Junior's "Black Suit." While the music was utterly vocal, the rap members practiced their singing skills based on what they had heard during their breaks, and they sounded impressive.

Hobi had started the song, and each member came in one by one to do their part. The audience cheered for them, clearly enjoying the performance.

"They are killing it, and the older hyungs show they can sing! It's just a cover, but they sound and look amazing!" Jaehyun complimented.

Jungkook smiled, mesmerized. "They do! They've been practicing very hard for the past week to nail this song," he said, bobbing his head to the music.

"How long has it been since they performed like this?" Eunwoo asked, watching Yoongi take over after Jimin's lines.

"It's been a while. They hadn't performed together recently because they felt they had lost some synergy. They thought it was burnout, so they took a break. Now they want to try again and see if that synergy returns," the boy explained.

"I hope they do. It seems like the synergy never left," he added. His friends nodded in agreement.

They didn't voice it, but something was missing now that it was mentioned. Their performance and stage presence were significant, but there was an intangible quality that could make them shine even brighter.

For a moment, they wondered what it would be like if Jungkook had joined them on stage. However, that thought quickly faded as they continued to admire the older men performing.

"So you won't forget me, a black suit to steal your heart," Jin sang the final line, and everyone in the club applauded.

Jungkook and his friends joined in as the performers bowed and took a breath.

"Thank you, everybody! I know it was just a cover, but we hope you all liked it! Thank you!" Jimin said into the mic and bowed again before stepping off the stage and removing his ear monitors.

"That was great, everyone! However, we all agree that we need to talk, right?" Namjoon remarked as they made their way back to their table. Everyone nodded in agreement.

It was clear how they felt about the performance, but they decided to discuss it later. Golden Ian would soon start performing, and they didn't want to miss it.

Jin checked his watch and stood up slightly to scan the club for any sign of Jungkook but found none.

"What's wrong, hyung?" Hoseok asked.

"Jungkookie still isn't here, and I'm worried. I was hoping he would see us perform," Jin frowned. The others looked around as well but saw no sign of him.

They felt disappointed but couldn't be upset.

"Do you think he got held up by his boss?" Jimin asked, hoping the younger boy would still show up.

"I don't think so. He texted that he was on his way about ten minutes ago..." Jin answered, checking his phone and feeling slightly anxious. He wondered if there had been a last-minute order at work.

"I'll call him after Golden Ian's performance. Hopefully, he sees it in time," he added, putting his phone away.

"Maybe he got stuck in traffic; there are many people here. I'm sure he'll show up! Jungkookie never disappoints. It would be sad but understandable if he didn't feel like coming to the end. Either way, he's fine and will be here soon! Don't overthink it!" Yoongi tried to cheer up Jin, who nodded in agreement.

The oldest was right; it was a Friday, and there was usually traffic.

"You're right, I'll wait longer!" He smiled and shook his head to refocus on the stage.

"I'm feeling nervous for some reason, or is it excitement? I want to see with my own eyes just how good he is," Namjoon said, changing the subject as they realized that Golden Ian could appear at any moment.

"Me too! I think it's exciting! Let's see what he's got!" Hoseok rubbed his hands together and took a big sip of his beer.

Meanwhile, Jungkook was preparing to head onto the stage in exactly one minute.

His nerves raced as he realized he was next. He knew there were many people, but seeing the crowd now, it looked more prominent than ever. He also felt significant pressure to make his performance exceptional today; he didn't want to disappoint the hyungs.

"Hey, it's okay, Jungkook! Breathe in and out. You got this!" Jaehyun squeezed his shoulder.

"Right, I can do this!" Jungkook told himself determinedly as he discreetly made his way to the other side of the club.

"Alright! Is everyone enjoying the night so far?" Jungkook's boss, Seojun, asked the crowd. He usually acted as the MC for every night's show.

"I'm glad! You all saw the amazing Bangtan, who always kills it! These boys truly deserve to be idols," he complimented, making the six boys shy.

"Now, it's time for the second most anticipated performance of the night. Seojun creates hype as the crowd begins to cheer.

"I think you all know who I'm talking about, right? Ladies and gentlemen, performing a melody inspired by MJ and Bruno, please welcome the well-known Golden Ian!" Seojun announces proudly before stepping down.

"I guess it's time we finally see who Golden Ian is," Yoongi smirks.

The stage is dark, but after a few seconds of snapping, a spotlight hits Jaehyun, then Eunwoo, followed by Mingyu and another dancer.

Everyone expects the spotlight to move to the center of the stage. Instead, an English voice with a deep tone resonates through the speakers, sending chills throughout the audience.

"You know me? You came here for me? Well, let me show you," the voice commands, and gasps of surprise echo in the room.

The spotlight shifts to the entrance area, and all eyes follow the light to reveal the man of the night. He stands there wearing a hat, glasses, and a cool mask that covers half his face.

"Whoa," Hoseok exclaims, feeling chills again.

As the beat starts again, Jungkook turns and walks toward the stage. The audience's eyes remain glued to him until he reaches the stage and continues the choreography with his friends and dancers.

"Damn, he's really good! Look at those sharp moves! Did he come up with that choreography all by himself?" Hobi asks, captivated by the man on stage. The others shrug in response.

They are speechless, completely mesmerized by the performance unfolding before them.

Loud cheers erupt as the lights dim, with minor spotlights illuminating the stage while the seven dancers finish the first song.

Jungkook smiles as he quickly glances toward the hyungs. Their mouths drop open in awe, their eyes glued to him.

Somehow, their admiration boosts his confidence, making him eager to prove himself right then and there.

The last beat of "Smooth Criminal" fades out.

Jungkook swiftly shifts into a new position with his dancers. The music starts up again with the iconic beat of "Beat It." Jungkook throws his hat into the audience.

He bobs his head to the front and quickly turns it to the side, ideally in sync with the beats.

The crowd began to cheer and clap, creating the loudest noise of the night, and if the youngest was honest, it boosted his adrenaline.

"He's an amazing dancer! Everything is so clean and precise! It's even better than what we've seen from our phones or tablets!" Taehyung remarks, taking a sip of his drink while keeping his eyes on the stage.

The song then transitioned smoothly into the next track. If someone were to listen to these songs in the exact order, it might lack cohesion, but Jungkook aimed to create transitions that made everything feel connected.

"Woo!" Jimin yelled, impressed by the dance moves the male performer was showcasing.

"This is 'Uptown Funk.' So far, he has played mostly American songs. Is he Korean American? Maybe this gives us a hint about who he is," Namjoon speculated as they listened to the song's upbeat rhythm.

"Wow, that was so clean!" Jin exclaimed, surprised. As the performance continued, he couldn't shake the feeling that Golden Ian's vibe reminded him of something or someone he couldn't quite place.

"Stop, wait a minute," they finally heard Golden Ian's vocal! He sang along while dancing to the song.

"His voice sounds amazing! He's singing all of that while dancing! I'm honestly really impressed!" Namjoon said, getting up and starting to vibe to the music.

The others looked at him and decided to join in. How could they resist? The performer's energy was infectious, and the song was incredibly catchy.

The whole plan was for no one to recognize his voice, especially Jin. However, the older man couldn't shake the feeling of familiarity with the male on stage, which was beginning to mess with his head. He tried to push it aside to focus entirely on the performance.

"I hope you all enjoyed the little tribute performance to the top artists! Was it good?" he asked.

"Yes!" the crowd cheered in response.

"I'm glad! What you just saw was primarily dance-based. Now, I want to showcase my vocals for those who may not have heard them yet!" he said, catching his breath.

"I'm not the best vocalist. I don't think I am better than others, but I like to think my voice is at least tolerable and somewhat pleasant to hear. They say practice is the best way to improve vocals, which is why I do what I do!" He smiled as he grabbed the microphone.

"This next song is different from the ones I previously danced to, and it will be tonight's last part of my performance. This is 'Dangerously' by Charlie Puth!" he announced, walking to the other side of the stage where a small keyboard was set up, unnoticed by the crowd.

Jungkook set the microphone on the stand and took a deep breath. He hoped to impress the hyungs even more with this song than his previous performances.

He heard the metronome in his ear, signaling the song's beginning.

"I've got this. Let's end on a high note, Ian," he whispered to himself as he began to play the piano.

"Is he good at playing, too? In the last 10 minutes, I've seen him do everything except rap. I wouldn't be surprised if he was good at that as well! If that's the case, he's practically an ace!" Yoongi crosses his arms but smiles.

He admires those who possess multiple skills and talents.

This is gonna hurt, but I blame myself first
'Cause I ignored the truth
Drunk off of that love, it F'ed my head up
There's no forgetting you

Relaxed and honey-like vocals were heard throughout the room.

"Wow, such stable and amazing vocals," Jin commented while watching the man on stage. For the third time that night, the oldest member felt he connected with Golden Ian's vibe.

This time, however, it wasn't just the vibe—it was the quality of his voice. Jin listened attentively to the vocals.

Jungkook removed the microphone from the keyboard and headed to the front.

You've awoken me, but you're choking me
I was so obsessed
Gave you all of me
And now, honestly, I got nothing left
I loved you dangerously
More than the air that I breathe
Knew we would crash at the speed that we were going
Didn't care if the explosion ruined me (me, me)
Baby, I loved you dangerously
Mm, mm
I loved you dangerously

Jungkook quickly removes his sunglasses and puts them on his shirt, letting everyone see only the top half of his face.

Usually, I hold the power with both my hands tied behind my back
Look at how things change
'Cause now you're the train

He opens his eyes and grabs onto the mic as he sings.

And I'm tied to the track
You've awoken me, but you're choking me
I was so obsessed
Gave you all of me
And now, hones'Cause got nothing left
'Cause I loved you dangerously
More than the air that I breathe
Knew we would crash at the speed we were going
Didn't care if the explosion ruined me (me, me)
Baby, I loved you dangerously

As the song progressed, everyone calmed down and listened to the man singing. Some people closed their eyes at parts of the song.

You took me down, down, down, down

Jungkook unhooks the mic with the stand and walks around the stage singing.

And kissed my lips with goodbye
I see it now, now, now, now
It was a matter of time, you know, I know
There's only one place this could lead, you are the fire. I'm gasoline
I love you, I love you, I love you

I loved you dangerously

He sings the high note with all his power.

"This is the I've ever seen..." Taehyung exclaimed, his mouth wide open as he shook his head in disbelief at the incredible talent he had just witnessed.

"Ooh-ooh, I loved you dangerously," the performer finished, his eyes closed as the lights dimmed. The audience erupted into applause, standing up to cheer for him. He smiled, though no one could see it behind his mask.

He bowed several times to show his gratitude for the crowd's reactions and flashed a peace sign before leaving the stage.

"Those eyes... that voice... why do I feel like I know him even though this is the first time I've seen him?" Jin whispered to himself as he watched the man exit. He shook his head, suddenly struck by a theory, before joining the others in clapping and cheering.

"Wow, he's amazing, incredible, talented... I could go on!" Namjoon praised the performance. The boys were highly impressed and blown away by the male performer.

They had seen his skills through videos posted on social media, but witnessing the boy in person was a completely different experience. You were captivated by him the entire time.

"Truly amazing, I agree! I loved his vibe and his outstanding singing skills! He has incredible breath control for a rookie," Yoongi said as he tore his gaze away from" the stage.

"I want him to perform with us! I think he would be an incredible addition to our performance if we do another one!" Taehyung excitedly announced as he sat down.

"What did you think, Jin Hyung?" Tae put a hand on Jin's shoulder.

"I liked him a lot. He was very mesmerizing and skillful. There was just something familiar about him, but I don't know why," Jin shrugged.

"Well, I felt that familiarity too, I won't lie. But I think it's just from all the videos we've seen beforehand," Hoseok tried to reason.
"That could be! Anyway, before I start worrying about Jungkook or talk more about Golden Ian, I think we need ot discuss our feelings about our own performance." Jin didn't as he took a seat.

"We should. I think we did really well, and I didn't feel burnt out at all, but—" Namjoon began.

"It still didn't feel like before. Something felt off or like it was missing, didn't it?" Jimin interjected, Namjoon nodded as his smile faded.

They wanted this performance to feel as complete and exciting as they once were. However, this latest performance confirmed that even though they didn't feel tired or burnt out anymore, something essential was lacking. They needed more to enhance their synergy.

"Ythey'dut what should we do then? Do you all think we shouldn't perform as a group anymore?" Hoseok asked shyly. "I wanted to continue performing with you all, but if things weren't resolved, they might have to stop performing together.

"I want to keep performing with you guys, so we must find a solution." Jimin frowned as they thought.

"I want that too," Yoongi added.

"I still think we should go with my idea! Maybe what we're missing is someone else. Why don't we ask Golden Ian? Maybe he'd be willing to collaborate with us. If not, we could try asking Jungkookie" again. I feel he has more talent than he shows," Taehyung suggested.

"He does. He's just really shy because of some things that have happened in his life," Jin explained with a frown.

We should definitely ask Golden Ian! If not, we can try with Jungkookie! And let's say that doesn't work out, well... we'll figure it out then, right?" Jin added.

The others agreed. It was worth a shot.

"Okay then, let's go talk to Ian. If it doesn't work out, we'll find Jungkookie. I wonder where he is. Has he still not arrived? Is he coming?" Yoongi glanced at the time and then at Jin, who shrugged.

"I don't know, honestly," Jin sighed.

"I'll talk to him later or go to his place. We should start heading out to see if Seojun will let us speak to Golden Ian! It's clear that we all want this, right?" Jin asked as he got up.

The others looked at each other and then at Jin, the oldest member.

"Okay, it's settled then! Let's go, guys!" Hoseok stood up. They hoped everything would work out.

Chapter Text

Jungkook stepped down from the stage, shaking his head in disbelief. He couldn't believe that this was his loudest crowd yet or that he had managed to impress the hyungs and everyone else.

While he had already wowed many with his past performances, this one had been much more thought out and planned. It also felt different because the hyungs—people he looked up to—were present.

He felt a deep sense of pride in what he had just accomplished and smiled to himself. "Is this what it feels like to be satisfied with your skills?" he asked, unaccustomed to feeling confidence or pride in his abilities.

"You killed it, Ian! You did such an amazing job! We blew everyone away!" Jaehyun exclaimed, hugging him tightly, causing Jungkook's body to shift slightly.

"You were so cool! That was incredible! Did you see how you heated up the crowd? Best performance yet! You did it, Jungkookie! The hyungs were really impressed!" Mingyu and Eunwoo chimed in, smiling as they removed their masks when they felt safe.

Jungkook beamed widely.

"Right? You had everyone, including the crowd, mesmerized! See, you didn't need to be nervous. You really killed it, you know that, right?" Eunwoo asked as they walked toward the dressing room.

"I do! I'm very proud of what I just did!" he admitted, which caused the other three to smile broadly. They loved hearing Jungkook compliment himself.

"You all shined as well! You made the performance look even better! People loved you guys, too. Didn't you see that one girl almost faint when Mingyu struck that pose? You all helped and were just as important. But thank you, really. I was nervous, but everything turned out well," Jungkook expressed his gratitude, prompting the others to shake their heads at his humbleness.

"I'm worried that Jin Hyung may have recognized me. Although it's been years since he last heard me sing, and my voice has definitely improved since then, something tells me he could easily recognize my voice. If not that, then maybe my dancing," Jungkook said as he sat down, feeling slightly anxious. They had already entered the dressing room.

"I don't think he did. Your voice has matured and grown, hasn't it?" Jaehyun asked.

Jungkook nodded in agreement.

"Do you think he even remembers how you sounded back then? You've taken vocal lessons, right? Your voice has surely matured," Jaehyun shrugged, and Jungkook shrugged.

"I did, but he's very good at remembering things. Here's to hoping! Anyway, I should get dressed and return to who I am! The hyungs, especially Jin, may be wondering why I haven't 'arrived' yet," Jungkook said, putting air quotes around the last word.

"We'll leave you to it then, Gguk! We'll still be at the club if you want to hang out or talk! We have our own groups of hyungs that also came today, so go enjoy!" Mingyu said as he got up with the other two.

Jungkook nodded, "Got it! You guys can go ahead!"

"I'll take your stuff back home later!" Eunwoo said. Jungkook gave him a thumbs-up and waved goodbye to the others as they left. He went to his bag to change clothes when he heard a knock on the door.

"Hey, may I come in? It's me, Seojun!" Seojun called out as Jungkook let him in. The 34-year-old man entered with a smile.

"Great performance out there, Jungkookie! That was your best one yet! I'm so proud of how much you've improved since you started here! I hope one day you can perform out there without the mask," Seojun said, giving him a high five.

"Thanks, Hyung! I hope so, too. I'm just not ready yet. I tried my best today and am very satisfied with my performance!" Jungkook smiled widely.

Seojun was one of the few outside of Jungkook's friend group who knew his secret, but only because he was the club's owner. He was also a little older and laid-back, which made the younger male comfortable sharing his truth from the start.

"You should be! That was top-notch! Anyway, I didn't come only to congratulate you and compliment you; I also wanted to talk to you about something else," the older man said as he sat down in another chair.

Jungkook began wiping the sweat from his face and neck with a towel. "What's up?"

"Some people have asked to talk to you, Golden Ian, about something. I wanted to know if that was okay?" Seojun asked.

"Who exactly?" the younger male replied, feeling nervous.

"Jin and your other friends. They approached me and asked if I could talk to you and see if they could compliment you on your performance. I told them I'd ask you first to see what you thought," Seojun explained.

Jungkook nodded, wondering why the boys wanted to talk to him. It couldn't be that they found out who he was, could it? He immediately began to panic at the thought.

"I—" he paused, thinking about what he wanted to say in response to the question. He didn't mind having his hyung talk to Golden Ian, but he was scared they might recognize him when he started talking.

He considered using a deeper voice but was unsure how effective that would be. He felt he should say no to the meeting but didn't want to come across as rude or arrogant.

"It's fine. Let them in. Hopefully, they won't figure out who I am. I'll keep the mask on," he decided at last.

"Do you think they will recognize me up close, hyung?" he asked, looking at the older man worriedly.

"Or should I talk like this? That way, they won't be able to tell it's me?" He changed his tone of voice.

"Well, you have blue contact lenses that look like your natural eye color. With the makeup and the mask on, I don't think they'll recognize you as the Jungkookie I know. Just keep your voice in that tone," Seojun reassured him.

"Why don't you at least tell Jin, Jungkook? I'm sure he'd be proud of you based on what he saw today!" Seojun said, placing a hand on the younger's shoulder.

"I know! I know he would, but I want to prove myself a little more first. I'll tell him soon, I promise," Jungkook replied, frowning. He wanted to earn recognition and make the older man proud in the best way possible.

"Alright, just make sure you tell him soon, okay? Don't let it go on for too long. Are you sure about them meeting you?" Seojun asked as he stood up to walk to the door.

"Y-yeah. Let them in," Jungkook said, managing a genuine smile.

Seojun nodded and left.

Jungkook took a deep breath, looking down. He knew his hyungs were interested in him but hadn't expected they would want to talk to him.

He caught a glimpse of himself in the mirror, adjusted his hair a bit, and wiped away some sweat. He took another deep breath, trying to calm himself.

Then, suddenly, there were two knocks at the door.

"Come in," he said, trying to keep his voice deep yet soft.

The door opened to reveal Kim Namjoon first, followed by the rest of the group, all smiling widely.

"Hi! Seojun said you agreed to meet us! Nice to meet you! I'm Namjoon, and this is Seokjin, Yoongi, Jimin, Hoseok, and Taehyung!" Namjoon introduced, while the others bowed.

Jungkook bowed back.

"Ah yes, I saw you guys perform. I've heard a lot about you all. You are very talented!" he spoke calmly, though he felt nervous inside.

"Thank you! You are just as talented, if not more so than us! You killed it out there! We've seen your performance online but didn't get a chance to see it live until today, and wow!" Hoseok complimented first.

The younger male blushed at the praise.

"Ah, really? Thank you! Though I believe you guys are more talented! Also, I hope you don't mind me keeping the mask on. Some people like to sneak a peek to see who I am, and I don't want to risk it," he expressed, even though it was a lie. While some fans were curious, he hadn't experienced any invasion of privacy so far.

"Oh no! Don't worry, we get it! We don't mind if you aren't ready to show yourself! You have your reasons!" Yoongi reassured him.

He only nodded.

"Anyways, Seojun Hyung said that you all wanted to speak to me about something?" he asked, changing the topic.

He looked at everyone and noticed that Jin looked at him more intensely than the others. It scared him that he had been caught.

"Right! Well, first of all, we were told by a friend of ours that you go to SNU?" Taehyung started.

"That's true, but please don't confirm it to everyone else," he said.

"We won't! You see, Jimin and I are part of the student council on campus, and the school is planning a big party event! We will announce it soon, and we are performing there," Taehyung continued, pausing to let someone else continue for him.

"Yeah, and we wanted to ask if you would be interested in performing something with us? Or at least performing at the party? We loved your skills and performance so much and thought maybe we could do something cool together!" Jin added.

Jungkook nodded. He hadn't expected them to ask him to join.

"Yeah! You were great, and we think we could have amazing synergy with you!" Jimin smiled.

"Ah..." he said, not knowing what to say. He couldn't provide an immediate response.

"You'd earn credits since you are a student at SNU!" Jimin added.

"Uhh, well, I don't know. I guess I'd have to think about it and need more information before making my choice," he responded a bit hesitantly.

"We can give you our numbers, and you can call or text us when you've decided. You don't have to do it either. You're a fantastic performer and feel more people should see that! We also think you'd be perfect for this, and it would be nice to get to know you a little better," Yoongi interjected, helping out Taehyung, who seemed unsure of how to reply.

"It's in a month and a half, so you would have time to practice, rehearse, and think it over," Namjoon added.

"In that case, I'll think about it and let you know. Whose number should I use?" he asked quietly while still managing to mask his voice.

"Mine! I'm more of a helper, but you can get the others' numbers too," Taehyung said, searching for paper and pen. Once he found them, he wrote down his number.

"Here, call us when you want about your choice. Once again, you were really cool out there. You are truly a performer. One question, though," Taehyung said as he handed the paper to Jungkook, who took it with a smile they couldn't see.

"Yes?"

"Are you younger than us or older?"

"Well, I guess that's up to you guys to figure out! I'll leave it at that," he replied.

"He is cool," Hobi remarked, amusedly covering his mouth. Jungkook chuckled quietly at his reaction.

"Well, in that case, it was very nice to meet you and see you perform, Ian! We look forward to your response and future performances at Seojun's place! You have great talent. We hope more people see it one day," Jimin said.

Jungkook blushed at the compliments, thankful no one could see his face because he knew he was as red as a tomato.

"You've complimented me too much. You guys did great, and I'm sure the other three are just as good. There's something about it that I know," he said. "I'll text you guys back to let you know!"

"Great! In that case, we should go and enjoy more before we leave. Thank you for complimenting us, too! Hope to speak to you again," Jin concluded. He tried not to make it obvious, but he was studying Ian the whole time.

"Ah, yes." He bowed, and the others bowed before saying farewell and leaving the dressing room. Once the coast was clear, Jungkook sighed in relief and sat down in the makeup chair, taking off his mask.

He didn't know how he would respond to their offer, but he could worry about that later. Right now, he was more concerned about others, thinking he had left them hanging.

He was also anxious that they had seen through him, but judging by their reactions, it seemed they had not.

"I need to get ready as quickly as possible!" he said to himself, beginning to remove his makeup and clothes. He hoped he could finish in ten minutes.

"I really hope he thinks it over and accepts our offer. Now that we know he's a student at SNU, it could make things easier since he knows the campus," Taehyung said at the bar with the others.

They had been discussing their meeting with Ian and how mysterious he was.

"I'm sure he will contact you with his answer, Tae. We barely met the guy! I'm not going to lie, though. I want to know who he is. He confirmed that he's from SNU so that he could be anyone..." Jin says.

"Hey, Jin! Isn't that Jungkook? He's here! Where has he been?" Namjoon pointed out the boy walking in their direction.

"Oooh, look at him! Is that the outfit you guys put together? It's so nice!" Jimin asked Jin, who widened his eyes and turned his head when Namjoon mentioned the younger member.

"There he is! He's about to get a good scolding from me today!" Jin said in a mock, angry tone. He wasn't really mad but did feel a little annoyed.

"Hey, hyungs! I'm finally here! I know what you'll say about me being late, so please let me explain!" Jungkook said with a frown and a tone filled with guilt.

"You better have some explaining to do, young man! I was worried about you! I was also irritated that you wouldn't come!" Jin crossed his arms and pretended to be angry, but again, he was only a little annoyed.

"I know, and I'm sorry, Hyung! Truth be told, I was supposed to arrive a maximum of 20 minutes late, but my taxi ride was really slow!" He started telling the best lie he could come up with.

"Then, when I arrived, you all seemed to be finishing up performing, which you did amazing from the bit I saw! Anyway, I decided to look for you all afterward, but then Golden Ian came, and it got really crowded, so I watched from the sides. After he was done, I went to look for you all again, but you were nowhere to be found, and my phone was dead. I went somewhere to charge it for a little while until I saw you guys here right now!" He explained, his tone showing he was sorry and didn't mean to make them feel like he stood them up.

"I'm really sorry that I made you all wait and worry!" He bowed his head slightly to show he was sincere. He hoped they would believe his lie. It was the best excuse he could come up with at the moment.

"You don't need to bow to us to apologize, Jungkookie!" Hoseok said, patting him on the back.

"I understand; today is very crowded, and it's easy to lose track of us after everything. If anything, we should also apologize for making you wait!" He added as Jungkook shook his head.

"No! Please don't! It's partly my fault!" He said, biting his lip afterward.

"Thank goodness you're here now! You had me worried, kid! It's no wonder you didn't answer your phone! Don't apologize; I'm just glad you came," Jin smiled and put an arm around him.

"Well, of course, I couldn't leave you guys hanging..." the younger replied shyly.

"It's okay, Jungkookie! You're here now, and that's what matters! We're sorry, too, because, after the show, we went to see if we could talk to Golden Ian, which is why you didn't see us until now," Yoongi explained.

Jungkook nodded, pretending he didn't know anything about it, as if he wasn't the one they were talking about just a few minutes ago.

"How did it go?" he asked, looking away.

"It went well! Though he's very mysterious, for sure. He really doesn't want people to identify him," Jimin tilted his head as he answered.

"You were right about him being from SNU. He told us he was from there, but he didn't say whether he was older or younger than us. I think he's younger," Taehyung added, and he gave the younger boy a slight smile at the end.

"We also asked him about performing with us at the party. He said he would think about it," Jin added.

"I see. I take it you guys still don't feel like your performance was complete?" Jungkook asked shyly. The others shook their heads and frowned.

"Sadly, no. It was complete when it came to practice and performing a full song correctly, but it didn't make us feel the way it used to, which really sucks," Namjoon frowned and then took a sip of his drink.

"I'm sorry, hyungs; I don't understand why. From what I saw, you all looked great up there! It was only a cover song, but still, it was very good," he tried to cheer them up with compliments.

"Thanks, Jungkookie, but it wasn't enough," Hoseok shrugged.

"Say, are you sure you aren't skilled at something music-related, Gguk? We know you said no, but I feel like you have a lot more talent than you think! You'd probably fit in with us!" Hobi brightened when asking Jungkook about performing. He remembered the younger member had said no last time, but it was worth trying again.

"He's great at piano, so he does have musical talent. It would be great if you could join us, Gguk! You'd get to spend more time with us, and we'd see how talented you are. Then we could blow everyone away! We'd tell Golden Ian that we found someone, too!" Jin put his arm around the shy younger member.

"No pressure, though. That's the last thing we want. We just get the feeling you are very talented!" Jimin clarified.

"I appreciate it, hyungs, but I don't know. I'm sorry. Maybe see what Golden Ian thinks, and if it doesn't work, maybe..." he paused and bit his lip, making sure his next words were carefully chosen. He really wasn't sure.

"Just maybe I'll think about the possibility," he finally said, which was enough to make the others smile.

"Okay, we will let you know then. Anyway, enough about Golden Ian.

"Now, guys, what do you say we help Jungkook feel less nervous and shy by having a drink with him and dancing to some music? Let's relax and let loose because it's the weekend, and we aren't getting any younger!" Jin cheered excitedly, making the others laugh as they could tell he was getting a little tipsy.

"You mean you aren't getting any younger. I'm still young!" Jungkook teased back, causing Hobi to almost spill his drink at Jungkook's comment.

Yoongi just smirked as he drank his beer.

Namjoon, Taehyung, and Jimin chuckled along, surprised to see Jungkook dish out such playful banter with Jin.

"Yah! For your information, I'm only four years older than you! I'm still young too! I'm no old man!" Jin exclaimed, feigning offense. Jungkook laughed and nodded.

"Here's an example that he's not as angelic and kind-hearted as you all think! Do you see how this little brat disrespected me? Even when I've been the one to raise him!" Jin shouted, with Jungkook laughing, knowing the older man was joking and none of his words were seriously meant.

"You've had a part in raising me, but you haven't raised me fully, hyung," Jungkook added, stoking the playful rivalry. He hoped the others weren't taking his words literally.

From the sounds of their laughter, it seemed Jungkook's intentions were clear.

"Well, I guess no more buying your food, you ungrateful brat!" Jin shot back.

"Don't be too hard on the kid, Jin. He's just joking around," Yoongi defended Jungkook, who smiled at him shyly. He really was just trying to be himself.

"Just wait until he gets comfortable with you guys and does the same! You won't be defending him then!" Jin crossed his arms over his chest, pretending to be annoyed, but secretly, he loved that the younger male was starting to open up.

"Anyway, why don't we all hit the dance floor now? We've already seen what we wanted tonight, but why not enjoy the rest of the night and party?" Jimin suggested, placing his finished drink on the table.

"I'm in! It's been a while; let's get a little wild!" Hoseok said, getting up and preparing to go.

"Let's all go! Why not? It'll give us a chance to see Jungkook dance too! Come on, want to join us?" Namjoon looked at Jungkook, who smiled shyly.

"Uhm..." he hesitated. Joining them would bring attention to him, and he didn't know if he was ready for that.

"Come on, Kook! Let's go!" Jimin gestured for him to follow.

"Enjoy the night, Kook! Just for one night, leave all your worries behind," Jin said, placing a hand on his shoulder and looking at him with a warm smile.

He was right; he couldn't always hold himself back from having fun and being a normal 21-year-old. He could always return to worrying and dealing with his shyness at the start of the week.

"Come on!" Hobi was now the one urging them forward as he walked toward where Jimin was standing.

"Okay," Jungkook nodded and followed the two dancers.

"We'll be by your side, even if others get caught up in dancing. I promise you'll have fun!" Jimin extended his hand again.

"Okay." He smiled back and took Jimin's hand. The older boy beamed as he pulled Jungkook onto the dance floor, Hoseok following closely.

Throughout the night, Jimin and Hoseok encouraged Jungkook to let loose. It took some time, but eventually, Jungkook was able to dance carefree alongside them, with Taehyung joining their side once he saw them on the dance floor.

It was challenging for Jungkook at first, but after remembering Jin's words, he decided to be free and enjoy the moment.

He knew he would regret setting himself free the next day, but right now, he didn't care. Maybe it was the alcohol, maybe it was the boys, or maybe it was just the atmosphere of the place. He didn't know, but what he did know was that he wanted to have fun and experience the same joy as everyone else his age. So, he danced and partied with the members until the night ended.

Monday

By now, it was Monday, and the six hyungs had decided to meet a little earlier to spend some time together and discuss something that had been on their minds since the weekend.

Everyone had arrived except for Jimin, who was usually a little late.

"So, I know Jimin is almost here, but while we wait, can I just say? The weekend was amazing! The hangover headache we had the next day wasn't fun at all, but the night before was!" Jin said happily as he took a sip of his coffee and blew on it.

"It really was great! Golden Ian is awesome. I can see why people love watching him perform. His performance over the weekend was clearly the best; everyone keeps talking about it, even more than usual!" Hoseok nodded in agreement.

It was true; since they had arrived on campus, the most talked-about topic was Golden Ian and the spectacular show he had put on at the club. Everyone was saying it had been the best one yet. Of course, people also talked about how well they had performed, but Golden Ian was the main subject of discussion.

"I kind of want to see him again next weekend if he performs. Not to pressure him into responding to us since he said he'd contact us, but still, it's nice to watch him," Yoongi said as he sipped his coffee.

"He was amazing! Hopefully, he agrees to perform with us; if not, I don't know what we'll do..." Taehyung frowned.

"I'm here! Sorry, I took so long, guys. This time, I really had no excuse—I just kind of overslept," Jimin said as he walked in, looking guilty, and sat next to Yoongi and Jin.

"It's fine; we still have some time before our classes," Namjoon smiled at him.

"So, what were you guys talking about before I came? Was it about the weekend?" Jimin asked, ruffling his hair.

"Yeah! We were talking about how amazing Golden Ian was; that man has talent," Jin replied.

"He does! I was really impressed by him! I truly wonder if he will be able to perform with us. I think we could pull something great off together!" Jimin nodded, smiling.

"It was also really fun hanging out with Jungkookie! Finally, we had a good time together. He's so much fun. He talks more and lets loose once he's had a few drinks and gets past his shyness. I really wish we could get him to hang out with us more..." Hoseok said, frowning.

They had all gone home late on Saturday night because they were having so much fun as a group of seven friends. Jungkook had brought them a lot of energy and enthusiasm.

He had been shy at first, but after letting loose, the younger one had talked and danced with them all night. They couldn't help but wish to spend even more time with him and get to know him better.

They didn't say it out loud, but they sometimes felt jealous that Jin was the closest one to him. Of course, they understood that Jin had known him since they were kids, and that made sense.

Yet, they wanted to be close friends with him, too, because of his good nature and sweet personality.

"Yeah! He was really fun, and he's sweet and kind. I wish he would open up to us more; we could help him feel more confident. It would be better to do things as a group of seven," Yoongi spoke this time.

Jin just frowned. He also wanted the younger to be closer to the others. He knew that Jungkook wanted that too but was scared of judgment and gossip—he was insecure and tended to step back.

Jin always tried to find a way to bridge that gap, but nothing seemed to work. It was hard since they had different majors. While all of them were music, dance, and acting majors, Jungkook was focused on visual arts.

However, they did share one class in common, even if it wasn't at the same time; they all had the same professor.

"I think I have an idea on how we could get Jungkookie to spend more time with us! We all have the same art class, right? And photography, too?" Jin asked, his eyes shining with excitement.

They all nodded in agreement.

"Great! Okay, I know you all have had some trouble in those classes, but Jungkook excels in both! I think I could talk to the professor and convince him to have Jungkookie tutor us. That way, he would spend time with us while helping us improve. Maybe, after a while, he won't need to be convinced to want to be with us!" Jin explained.

"He has other classes to worry about, though, hyung. Are you sure it won't be too much pressure?" Namjoon asked.

"It won't be! That kid is smart and always manages to stay advanced in his studies. I promise you all," Jin replied confidently.

"Well, I guess why not? Only if he's willing to really help us. It could work, and then we could have him come to us willingly," Taehyung shrugged.

Overall, they were all on board with the idea. They felt a little bad about tricking him, but it was all coming from a good place.

"Great! I'll talk to the professor during my break!" Jin smiled. He hoped this would help both the guys and Jungkook feel closer together. Maybe what Jungkook needed was a little support from friends to feel more secure in his own life.

                                                        ________________________

"Golden Ian." That was the topic of discussion Jungkook had heard ever since he attended his first class. Although Golden Ian was always in the spotlight, this time the conversation intensified. The videos featuring him had gained many views on social media, and now more people outside of campus were aware of it as well.

This made him feel proud, but he couldn't help but feel shy about the attention. He wondered if it was okay for him to be gaining popularity.

If only those people knew that he was the one they were talking about.

However, that wasn't his main concern. His biggest worry was how to respond to his hyungs' request to perform with them.

He wanted to do it, but he also didn't want them to discover Golden Ian's identity. He was unsure how he'd be able to practice with them without someone revealing who he was.

It was all so complicated. He could say no, but he didn't want to since he had already turned down the invitation as Jungkook himself.

He definitely needed to consult with his friends for advice. They were the only ones he could rely on.

Shaking his head, he left his class and was about to text his friends to ask where they were when two people lightly pushed against him from behind.

"Hey there, stranger! Mind telling us why you didn't text us all weekend?" Eunwoo, Mingyu, and Jaehyun asked as they stood next to him.

"Yeah! We were curious to know your thoughts about Saturday and the hyungs! We saw you having so much fun and finally being yourself—how could we not want to hear about it?" Jaehyun nudged, reminding him of the fun he had.

"Well, it was great! You said it yourself—I was finally able to relax. It was so enjoyable to be with them! They're all cool and good people," he smiled as they walked.

"They just told me to trust them and let go, so I did. That was all they needed to do. Though, I'll admit, having a bit of alcohol in my system helped, too. They were just so patient with me, slowly guiding me to let loose. I wish I had that confidence all the time," he sighed.

"Why don't you? They clearly don't care what others say! If you were able to relax at the club, what's stopping you at school? Most of the people there were from school!" Eunwoo pointed out, stopping when they reached a bench to sit down.

"Yeah, plus being, you know, Golden Ian seems to have helped you with your insecurities. It's time to just hang out with them. I know your past hasn't been easy, but the hyungs, especially Jin, would protect you from anyone..." Mingyu added, and Jungkook sighed.

He knew they were right.

"I know. You guys are right. Now that I hung out with them that night, I can try to slowly look past people judging me for being with them, but... let me gain the courage in the coming days, and I'll try," he said. He needed to push back against people's thoughts and get used to some attention instead of being a coward.

"I'll try, even though it would be hard to hide from them, Golden Ian. Speaking of which, you guys need to help me," he whined, sighing.

"Yesterday, after you guys left, hyung told me that some people, specifically the hyungs, wanted to talk to me. I said yes, but I was panicking, thinking they had recognized me or would recognize me, but they didn't. Luckily, I hadn't taken off my disguise yet," he explained to the meeting.

"They what?! What happened next?" they asked, filled with curiosity.

"Well, the good thing is they didn't recognize me. They complimented my performance and how amazing it was. After some small talk, they asked if I'd be interested in performing with them at the party, saying that I'd fit right in and that we could create something great together," he finished explaining.

"And? What did you tell them?" Eunwoo asked.

"I didn't give them an answer. I told them I'd think about it. I don't know what to do... I mean, I want to do it and help them out. I think it would be cool to perform with them as Golden Ian..." he started.

"But... what's the issue?" Mingyu asked, knowing his friend was about to voice a negative thought.

"I would need to practice with them to prepare for the party, which means I'd have to always be dressed up as Golden Ian when I'm with them. I don't see much of an issue with that; I can hide my hair with a beanie, wear contact lenses, and all that so they won't notice me. But even then, I feel like it's risky, especially with Jin Hyung. There's also my voice..." he replied nervously, crossing his arms against his chest.

"Or maybe they won't recognize you if you don't speak much and change your tone. They didn't recognize your voice on Friday! I don't think they would this time," Jaehyun tried to reason with the youngest.

"I guess, but my voice was almost unrecognizable on Friday because of all the singing. What if this time they can recognize me?" he asked.

"Test it out right now! Try making a different sound and accent," Mingyu shrugged while Jungkook nodded in agreement.

He sat up straight and tried to create a deeper, accented voice that felt comfortable and not forced.

"How about this? Does this work?" he asked in his alternate voice.

The three friends exchanged wide-eyed glances. It seemed their friend was indeed good at everything.

It sounded almost entirely different from his usual voice.

"What? Didn't it sound right? Can you tell?" Jungkook asked, reverting to his usual tone and expression. He was worried that there wouldn't be much of a difference.

"No..." Mingyu chuckled at the boy's insecurity.

"You actually didn't sound like yourself at all! We're just amazed that you're good at everything, even changing tones of voice!" Eunwoo added as they all nodded in agreement with Jungkook.

He squinted his eyes, feeling as though they were bluffing. He was convinced he sounded almost the same.

"Are you guys sure? You aren't playing with me, right?" he asked skeptically.

"No, really! You didn't sound like you usually do! I don't think the hyungs would truly find out, especially Jin," Eunwoo responded.

"I agree. I think you would be fine," Jaehyun said.

"Yeah, it looks like there isn't much trouble figuring out what to do with the hyungs. You can pull it off, but will you?" Mingyu asked.

While the younger could share ideas about what he could do, they didn't know if he would actually act on it or retreat into his fears and overthinking.

"I don't know... I want to, but I think I want to think about it a little more. What do you all think?" he said, placing his arms on the table.

"I think you should go for it! You'd be spending more time with them and getting to know them better," Eunwoo shrugged.

"Yeah, and you'd be learning from them, too, which could help improve your skills. I don't see why you can't accept it, but it's up to you, Gguk! Whatever your heart and mind tell you!" Jaehyun said, placing a hand on the other's shoulder.

He smiled, feeling grateful for his good friends.

"I guess... I'll think about it tonight and see what I decide," he frowned. He wished he could just say yes and accept the proposal, but he wanted a little more time to figure out if having to dress up as Ian more often just to practice with them would work out.

He wanted to feel certain in his mind, but doubts remained. He had a long night ahead filled with deep thoughts.

Chapter Text

If you were to ask Seokjin to describe in a few words how he was feeling, there would be three of them. 

The first is happiness mixed with slight pride and shock but some guilt. 

He felt shocked and proud because he couldn't believe it took so little for his professor to agree that the others would benefit from Jungkook's tutoring. He was proud because, it didn't take his professor much convincing. Happiness because finally, Jungkook would spend more time with him and his friends. 

He felt guilty because he felt terrible that he was setting up something behind Jungkook's back that involved him, but at the same time, it wasn't like he was hiding this from Jungkook for long; it was only to help the others and Jungkook get what they wanted, which was to get closer. 

He thought that he should think of it as giving a push. 

Now, he had to wait for the professor to bring up the tutoring session in tomorrow's class.

He looked at his phone and decided to text the group chat he had with the others as he walked to his car. 

Seokjin:  

Plan succeeded. Wait for tomorrow!

He texted and sent it. He knew there would probably be no response since the others were in their last class of the day. So, he put his phone away and entered the car, hoping that a solid friendship could finally be formed between his Jungkookie and the others. 

Jungkook felt hopeless. 

He had spent a whole week deciding and wondering if he should accept his hyungs proposal.

Of course, he had discussed the details with Eunwoo and Mingyu, but he didn't know how well that plan would work. 

Although he would dress differently and try to change his tone of voice, he couldn't help but feel that they would slowly figure out who he was. It wasn't the worst thing to have the older guys know he was Golden Ian, but he was not ready. 

Not just because he wanted to improve himself more as a performer and person, but there was also a slight fear in his mind that the others, specifically Jin, would get mad at him for not telling the truth sooner. 

It scared him that it could cause some drift in their friendship. He wasn't afraid of losing him because he knew the older male would never leave him. Still, he hated the thought of Jin acting indifferent, even if it only would be temporarily. 

At the same time, though, he knew they'd also understand and that Jin wouldn't get angry if he came clean, but he wasn't sure. 

He sighed. He wished he didn't overthink so much. 

He wished to hear a different opinion before making his choice. Still, he couldn't turn to anybody except for one person—his brother.

His brother didn't know, but somehow, he didn't mind telling his brother. 

Suddenly, as if the universe had heard him, his phone rang. The person calling no other than his brother. 

"Hi, Hyung! How have you been?" He asked first. 

"Ah, look at you asking the questions first now! I'm doing well! Work keeps me busy, but overall, I've been doing well. How about you? I hadn't called you in three weeks, so I thought now would be a good time," his brother replied with some guilt.

Jungkook's brother usually calls him often, but when his workload as a lawyer gets heavy, he goes without calling for a while. He doesn't mind because he knows his brother doesn't do it intentionally.

"Sorry, by the way," the older man says sadly. 

"It's okay, Hyung. I understand you; you don't have to worry. Being a lawyer overseas can be difficult...there are time differences, so it's okay. I know that you don't do it on purpose!" Jungkook smiled back, hoping his brother felt less guilt after what he said. 

Unlike Jungkook, who is pursuing his degree in Korea, his brother decided to travel to America to attend law school. He was later transferred to a law firm in London, which offered a higher position and better pay. It was a great opportunity, but it meant that Jungkook didn't get to see his brother often. He was used to it, but it still felt challenging at times. 

"It's good you think and feel that way. Sometimes I get worried that you may be very upset," 

"I'd never get upset, hyung. Sometimes, I miss you more than usual, but it's okay. I know you are a busy man, and what counts is that even if it isn't daily, you still call and check up on me. Please don't worry," he reassures his brother, feeling a deep understanding between them. 

"I promise that for your winter vacation, I'll come home for the holidays to see you and our parents, which, by the way, how are they? I speak to them often, but not all the time. It's been a while," he says softly at the end. 

"Away as usual. Right now, they are in Los Angeles overseeing the American branch. They left four weeks ago, and they seem to be doing okay. They both check up on me sometimes or at least they try to. It seems like things are going well, and they may be back in a month from now," he replies with a sad, soft tone, wishing he could see them more but also feeling used to the feeling of yearning. 

Their parents have always been good to them for the most part. 

Ever since Jungkook and his brother were born, their parents had done their best to give them love and care. But after Jungkook turned nine, their parents' joint company grew tremendously, demanding more of their time. With frequent travel added to their responsibilities, they were home less and less. As a result, Jungkook and Junghyun were often left in the care of nannies or their grandparents.

Once they were old enough, it was mostly just the two of them. Their parents made efforts to spend time with them when possible, but work often took precedence. Jungkook understood their dedication to the company and didn't resent them for it, but deep down, he sometimes wished they had been around more.

Now that he was older, he saw them a little more, but it still wasn't the way he had hoped. He had also grown used to seeing less of Junghyun, especially after his brother started law school and later moved to London. It hurt to have another family member so far away, but at least Junghyun made the effort to call more often than their parents.

"Oh yeah, Mom mentioned they'd be in LA for a while to oversee some things," Junghyun said over the phone. "Anyway, what about you? How have you been? How's school? And how's Seokjin?"

"Whoa, too many questions at once," Jungkook chuckled, sitting up straighter.

Junghyun laughed. "Just making sure my little brother's doing okay."

"I'm fine. School's going well—stressful sometimes, but manageable. I've been okay... just dealing with a dilemma right now." He hesitated before quickly adding, "As for Jin-hyung, he's the same as always."

Junghyun picked up on his hesitation. "A dilemma? What's going on, Gguk?" His voice carried a hint of concern.

Jungkook debated whether to tell him. He had already brought it up, so maybe he should.

"Come on," Junghyun pressed gently. "You know you can talk to me. I'm your brother—you can trust me."

Letting out a deep sigh, Jungkook decided to give in.

"Alright... I'll tell you everything."

And so, he did. From the very beginning to the current issue he was facing, he told Junghyun everything about Golden Ian.

""So yeah, that's what's been going on in your brother's life for the past month. Be happy—I dared to tell you," Jungkook sighed, leaning his head back against the bed. "But I need help, hyung."

Junghyun chuckled softly before his tone turned warm. "First of all, can I just say how proud I am of you? I'm honestly surprised, but in the best way. It makes me really happy to know that you took this step—to face your fears and build confidence through Mystic Ian."

Hearing that filled Jungkook with a quiet sense of pride.

"I always knew, no matter what you said after everything that happened, that you never truly lost your passion for music and performing. You just lost your confidence. I could see it—even when you tried to hide it. I remember catching you playing the piano at home when no one else was around. You thought you were alone, but I knew."

Jungkook blinked, startled by the confession. "Wait... you always caught me?"

Junghyun let out a soft laugh. "Yeah. I never said anything because I didn't want to make you self-conscious. But you never had to be shy with me, Gguk. I'm your brother—I could never judge you like others did. Still, I understand... trauma is trauma. Even when it comes to family, it's hard to shake off." His voice softened. "So seeing you do this? It makes me really happy."

Jungkook swallowed, feeling a lump in his throat.

"But," Junghyun continued, "why haven't you told Jin-hyung? What's stopping you? You know he'd be proud of you, just like I am. He's practically your second older brother."

Jungkook sighed. "I know he'd be proud. But I want to grow as much as I can as Golden Ian first. I want to reach a point where I'm satisfied—where I've proven to myself that I can do this. If I tell him now, he'll want to help, and I don't want that. He's done so much for me already. This is something I need to do on my own."

He hesitated before adding, "And... I'm also scared. Scared that he'll be upset when he finds out. I know he wouldn't end our friendship, but I wouldn't blame him for needing space. He will be hurt, and it'll be my fault." He frowned, voice quieter. "I know I should've told him. But what's done is done."

Junghyun sighed. "I still think you should've told him, but I get it. You don't want any professional backing—you want to prove yourself on your own terms. I respect that. And honestly, I don't think he'd ever ignore you, even if he's hurt. Maybe he'll be disappointed, but that's it. I'm sure, more than anything, he'll be proud."

Jungkook let the words settle in his chest, exhaling slowly. "I hope so."

A beat of silence passed before he shook his head. "But right now, I need to figure out the other issue. Do I accept the proposal? Do you think what my friends and I discussed would actually work?"

"You already know the answer," Junghyun said simply. "You want to do it."

Jungkook froze slightly at how easily his brother read him.

Junghyun continued, "I think it's a great opportunity. And as for your plan—yeah, wearing a beanie and avoiding too much eye contact, it might help. But there's always a chance someone will start to get suspicious. It's up to you—if you're ready to come clean if they figure it out."

Jungkook exhaled heavily. "I know there's a risk. That's why I called you. It's my whole dilemma."

"But?" Junghyun prompted.

Jungkook closed his eyes briefly before letting out a small laugh, one filled with something lighter—acceptance.

"But... I think I'm willing to take the risk," he admitted. "Because deep down, I do want to do this. Maybe for a lot of reasons, I haven't fully figured out yet. But talking to you made me realize that much."

"Hm, looks like you've got your answer," his brother said reassuringly. "Don't worry, everything's going to be okay. This might even help you with your goals."

"I was thinking the same thing. I'll do my best not to get recognized. Guess I'll need to text them soon. I just have to find my old phone—can't risk sharing this number, or anything else for that matter," he sighed, scanning the room in search of his old device.

"Right, it'd be a dead giveaway if you gave out your current number. Anyway, do you feel better now?"

"I do. You called just as I was thinking of asking for your help. Thanks, Hyung. You've always been there to listen, no matter the distance. I really admire you," he smiled, his voice filled with gratitude.

"I'll always be here, little brother," his brother responded warmly. "I knew it'd be my duty when you came into our lives 21 years ago!" He chuckled, and the younger sibling laughed along.

"I'm glad to hear that!" Jungkook said, chatting with him for a few more minutes before ending the call.

"Remember, just follow your heart and everything will fall into place, okay? And, I don't need to remind you, but eat well and get plenty of sleep!" his brother added at the end.

"I will! But hey, you take care of yourself too, mister!" Jungkook replied.

"I will. Alright, I'm heading out. Talk soon, little kookie," his brother said, wrapping up the conversation.

"Take care, Hyung!" Jungkook smiled as he hung up. He set the phone down and rested his hand on his chin, thinking.

"I guess I've got a lot of planning ahead, especially with all the details," he mused, then stood up to hunt for his old phone and brainstorm some outfit ideas for when he started working with the others.

"So you really convinced the professor?" Hoseok asked, his tone filled with surprise as he processed the details Jin had just shared.

The boys had gathered early the next day on campus to discuss Jin's actions.

"Yes! Like I said, when professors see something beneficial, they'll agree to almost anything. Especially with tutoring—it helps the students grow. He was on board right away because he wants the best, and they know Jungkook is our best right now," Jin explained, taking a sip of his coffee and offering a small smile.

"I was so happy when he said yes— you have no idea! Although, I can't help but feel a little guilty for going behind Jungkook's back," he added, his expression shifting as he frowned slightly. The guilt wasn't weighing on him too much, but there was still a small twinge of discomfort.

"I think it would've been better if you told him, but it's not a huge deal. You can always tell him later. I'm sure he'll understand," Jimin smiled reassuringly at Jin.

"Plus, you'll be helping him by tutoring us, so it should be fine. You're only doing this to help him and all of us," Jimin added, looking around at the others with excitement.

"Yeah, I don't think you need to worry too much," Namjoon nodded in agreement.

"No way!" Taehyung suddenly exclaimed, looking down at his phone, his face a mix of shock and excitement.

The others noticed his sudden shift in mood and turned to him, curiosity piqued.

"What's got you so excited, Tae?" Yoongi, who was sitting next to him, asked, raising an eyebrow.

"Today's full of good news! Guess what I just got on my phone?" Taehyung grinned, holding up the phone but keeping it facing down.

"What?" Namjoon asked, eager to know.

"It's better if you just tell us, Tae. We won't be able to guess," Jin said, crossing his arms and leaning on the table.

"Golden Ian just texted me! He said he's thought it over and has agreed to do the performance with us at the party! He's in!" Taehyung nearly shouted with joy.

The others stared at him in disbelief, their mouths slightly agape.

"Wait—really?!" Yoongi asked, his voice filled with surprise as Taehyung nodded happily.

"The mysterious and popular unknown guy on campus actually accepted our proposal? We made that good of an impression on him?" Jin asked, his disbelief evident.

"Yup! Look, check my texts!" Taehyung said, handing his phone to Yoongi, who passed it around to the others.

"This is great!" Namjoon smiled, passing it back to Taehyung. "Maybe with Ian on board, we'll see what's missing from our professional side. Plus, we'll get to work with someone who's incredibly talented!"

"He'll get more exposure too. Honestly, I thought he wasn't going to accept, but he did," Jimin added, shaking his head in amazement.

They'd all thought Ian wouldn't say yes. Sure, they held out some hope, but since the guy didn't know them, they didn't expect him to agree so easily.

"Nice! So when are we meeting up?" Jin asked, his mind already jumping to the next step. "I need to tell Jungkookie today! Maybe he helped us get this far?"

"Ooh, maybe he did! If so, we definitely need to thank him. Today's turning out to be a great day," Taehyung agreed, his smile widening.

"It really is! Anyway, please, I need you all to act surprised when the professor announces that Jimin and Jungkook will be helping you, okay? I've got to head to my next class, but I'll catch up with you guys later!" Jin said, gathering his things and standing up. He had another class to attend.

"Your secret's safe with us!" Yoongi said with a wink, and the others waved him off as he left.

Jungkook stared at the text Taehyung had sent. He couldn't believe it—Ian had actually accepted their proposal and responded so quickly. He was really pushing himself this year, stepping out of his comfort zone more than ever.

He was shocked when the older male texted back so rapidly, suggesting a day and time to meet. But he knew they had been desperate to find someone else to perform with them, to try out new ideas.

He hadn't yet told his friends about his decision, but he figured they'd be happy for him. After all, they had been encouraging him to accept as well.

With a sigh, he checked his phone and was snapped out of his thoughts. "Shit, I need to go!" he muttered, realizing he had only 7 minutes to get to class.

Jumping up from where he'd been eating lunch, he tossed his food and rushed out the door. The walk to his hall was a bit far, and he was worried about being late, but luckily, he made it just in time.

He scanned the room for his usual seat but saw it was already taken. Frowning, he started looking for another spot when he noticed Jimin and Taehyung waving at him to sit next to them.

He had some classes with the hyungs but always kept to himself, sitting further away. It wasn't intentional—he was just naturally shy. The others often seemed like they wanted him to sit with them but didn't push it, worried it might make him uncomfortable. But now, they seemed determined to get Jungkook to open up to them.

Smiling, he made his way over. He was going to be spending more time with them, especially with Ian involved, so he might as well start getting used to it. Plus, he felt guilty for always turning them down. Despite his insecurities, it seemed like a good chance to start connecting.

"Hey, hyungs!" Jungkook greeted as he sat down, glancing around quickly to gauge the reactions of others as he settled next to the two well-known boys. Thankfully, not many people seemed to take notice, or if they did, they didn't care much. A few were surprised, but Jungkook tried his best to shrug it off.

"Jungkookie! Finally, you're sitting with us for class!" Taehyung teased, grinning at him. "Guess the weekend hangout worked, huh? Looks like it helped with how shy you feel around us!"

"That was a fun night," Jungkook replied shyly. "I also felt bad for always turning you guys down when you've been so nice and patient with me."

The two older boys couldn't help but coo at his response.

"Aww, you're cute! It's okay, we never pushed you because we didn't want to make you uncomfortable. But it does make us happy that you've decided to sit with us! Feel free to do that from now on!" Jimin added with a smile.

Jungkook nodded shyly, a small smile on his face. He really hoped this class went well. If it did, and if no one judged him too harshly, maybe he could sit with them more often.

The professor entered just then. "Good afternoon, class! It's good to see you all! I'll take attendance, and then we'll get started, yes?" he said, causing everyone to nod.

-

-

Later, after a smooth lecture, the professor wrapped things up. "So, that will be your assignment for the final project. I know it's early in the semester, but I wanted to give you all a heads-up! Next week, I'll assign some homework to help with your project," Mr. Choi, their photography professor, said.

The boys had understood everything well, and for Jungkook, it was one of the first times he felt truly content in class. He was used to feeling lonely and isolated, but today, with Jimin and Taehyung by his side, it was different. He felt more included.

"Alright, you're all dismissed!" Mr. Choi announced. "Jimin, Jungkook, Taehyung, I'd like to speak with you three for a moment. Is that alright? Or do you have other classes to get to?"

Jungkook was confused. Why did Mr. Choi want to speak with the three of them specifically? He glanced at Jimin and Taehyung, who both nodded politely.

"Sure!" Jimin replied, already knowing what was coming.

"It's nothing serious, I promise," Mr. Choi assured. "But I do need four more people to come in for a second so I can discuss something with all seven of you."

"Wait, four more people? So, you want to talk to seven of us?" Jungkook asked, even more confused.

"Yes, don't worry, Jungkook-ssi," Mr. Choi said, offering a warm smile. "It's just about a few things regarding the class. It'll be fine."

"Don't worry, Jungkookie!" Jimin said, wrapping his arm around Jungkook's shoulders. He wanted to tell him exactly why the professor had asked them to stay, but he held back.

Jungkook stiffened slightly at the unexpected action, but he didn't mind it as much as he might have earlier.

"I know, but professors rarely ask me to stay after class," Jungkook confessed, his insecurities slipping out. "It makes me think I've done something wrong, or maybe I'm slacking."

"What could you possibly need help with?" Taehyung chimed in with a playful smile. "You're one of the best photographers in here! Plus, Mr. Choi loves your work. I think Jimin's right; you don't have anything to worry about. Trust in yourself!"

Jungkook smiled shyly, his anxiety starting to melt away after hearing their comforting words. "I'm not sure, but thank you!" he said quietly, just as someone else spoke up.

"Hello, Professor! We're here!" Jin's voice echoed through the room, and Jungkook's eyes widened in surprise. He quickly turned to see Jin and the other hyungs entering, all bowing to the professor.

"Hey, the guys are here!" Taehyung exclaimed, walking toward the front where Mr. Choi and the rest of their friends were.

Jungkook, still confused but now even more surprised, followed Taehyung and Jimin to the front.

"Hey, hyungs! Hi, Jin hyung!" Jungkook bowed, then waved at Jin, who had a huge smile on his face.

"Hello, Jungkookie!" Jin greeted warmly, walking over to give him a hug.

"Hi, Gguk! It's good to see you!" Hobi added, and soon the others greeted him in kind.

"Thank you, guys! It's always good to see all of you!" Jungkook smiled, feeling genuinely happy despite the confusion.

"You guys are crazy. We saw each other two days ago!" Yoongi teased, getting straight to the point. "Professor, what is it you wanted us here for?"

"Yes, let me get to that," Mr. Choi said, after everyone had greeted each other. "I'm glad you all know each other well. I wanted to speak to all of you because, after reviewing the grades and past assignments, I noticed that while most of you are doing well, a few of you could use an extra boost. No one is failing, but some of you are sitting around a C, which isn't bad, but I'd like to see it higher."

He looked around the room, meeting each of their eyes. "I'm sure you all know who I'm talking about. But, there are also a few of you doing excellent work, and I thought it might be helpful for Jimin, Jungkook, and Taehyung to help Namjoon and Hoseok with their art, while Taehyung and Jungkook show Jin and Yoongi how to edit and improve their photography skills."

Jin smiled, relieved. His plan had worked.

Jungkook blinked, slightly widening his eyes in surprise. He didn't expect to be asked to tutor not one, but two subjects.

"This won't be forever, just until you guys feel more confident in your work and your grades improve. This is just a suggestion, of course," Mr. Choi added, glancing at them. "I know you may have other things on your plate, Jungkook-ssi, especially since you've been balancing a lot with school and other commitments. But you're so good at both of these skills, I think you'd be able to help these guys get just as good."

Jungkook lowered his shoulders shyly. "Uhh, thank you! But it's not a problem at all. I don't really have anything too important going on, so I don't mind helping my hyungs with their art skills! I won't be doing it alone, so it's fine."

Though, truth be told, he did have a somewhat busy schedule. Work, practice for performances, and schoolwork were all piling up. He realized he might regret this later, but he didn't want to turn down his hyungs. They'd always been kind and patient with him, and he felt bad not helping them.

Besides, this was also an opportunity to get closer to them. He'd spent so long pushing them away out of fear and insecurity, but it was time to face those fears. If he wanted to change, he had to step out of his comfort zone. He could do it with this.

Deep down, he also knew this would help alleviate the guilt he felt about not spending more time with Jin. It was time to stop letting his insecurities hold him back and allow himself to be a part of something bigger.

"Are you truly sure, Jungkook? It's okay if not, we can always find other ways," Jin asked, looking at him carefully. Even though this was his plan and he had high hopes for it, he still didn't want to push the younger into anything.

"Yes, I've made up my mind. I'm sure it's okay. As I said, I won't be the only one helping you all out, so it shouldn't be too much for me," Jungkook responded firmly.

The others smiled at him, nodding in agreement.

"Well then, I guess that settles it! Thank you, Jungkook-ssi! And thank you as well, Jimin-ssi and Taehyung-ssi. I have no doubt you three will be able to help these talented young men improve their skills," the professor complimented.

"Anyways, that's all I wanted to discuss with you all!" He checked his watch and a concerned look crossed his face. "I should get going now. My next class is on the other side of campus, and I have 7 minutes. I'll leave you guys to figure out the schedule. See you next class! Have a good day!" With that, he gathered his things.

"See you, professor!" One of the group called out, bowing before heading out.

"Let's go somewhere else to plan this, yeah?" Namjoon suggested, already heading toward a quieter part of campus. The others followed, eager to figure out the details.

Once they found a secluded area with benches and a table, they settled down to talk.

"Okay, so since you're the main helper for both courses, I think we should base our schedule around yours! What days can you do, and what days are off-limits?" Yoongi began, making sure they got the details right.

Jungkook's eyes widened slightly at the idea of them working around his schedule. He thought both their schedules were just as important to consider.

"What? No, it's okay! I can work around your schedules! You guys are much busier than I am," Jungkook quickly protested, worried.

"Jungkookie, please," Jin said, giving him that familiar "don't argue with me" look. "We can manage. Just start with yours, alright?"

"Uhm, okay. I don't have classes on Fridays, and I only have one class on Mondays and Wednesdays. But I usually study on Fridays in the morning until the afternoon. Weekends depend because I sometimes have work shifts. I alternate weekends." He gave them a nervous smile, hoping his schedule wouldn't cause any issues. "I'm mostly free except for Fridays and weekends."

"Oh! You have the same schedule as Namjoon and me!" Hoseok said, his face lighting up.

"We can do Mondays and Wednesdays after the afternoon," Namjoon added, nodding. He turned to Jungkook, who gave a short nod in return.

"My schedule's pretty similar to Taehyung's. Yoongi's is almost the same, just with an extra class. We have two classes on Mondays and Wednesdays, a long one on Tuesdays, but Thursdays and Fridays are mostly free to meet with the student body. We finish classes around 3, though," Jimin explained.

"In that case, how about Mondays and Wednesdays after 4? Then we can alternate some weekends, maybe a Saturday? What do you guys think?" Yoongi suggested, already thinking ahead.

"That works! If anything changes after we talk with Golden Ian, we'll let you know!" Jin added, placing a hand on Jungkook's shoulder.

"Wait, you guys actually heard back from Golden Ian?" Jungkook asked, faking surprise as best as he could. Thankfully, it sounded convincing.

The others nodded eagerly, all grinning.

"He did! He accepted it! We just need to work out the details," Namjoon said. He then ruffled Jungkook's hair lightly, his smile widening. "But don't worry, tutoring and spending time with you is our top priority right now."

"Don't worry! I know you need balance! And I'm glad he responded. I hope you figure everything out with him, but if anything changes, just let me know! I think the schedule you came up with should work fine!" Jungkook added, feeling a sense of calm now that they'd worked things out.

"I think it will! If anything changes, we'll let you know for sure, Jungkookie!" Taehyung said, nudging Jungkook gently. The younger smiled shyly, cheeks flushed at the attention.

"You're all flattering me too much, but I'm looking forward to it. I'll do my best to help you guys!" Jungkook said with a warm smile.

"Great! We'll start next week so you and Jimin can prepare the material together. You have their numbers, right?" Jin asked, making sure everything was clear.

"I do! You gave them to me the first time I met you guys," Jungkook replied, remembering how eagerly Jin had handed out their numbers. He still wondered if Jin had asked for permission first, but decided it wasn't that important. Everyone seemed okay with it.

"Ah, right!" Jin said, chuckling at the memory.

The others laughed too, feeling more at ease.

"Well, unfortunately, I've got to go. I'm covering an extra shift today, but I'll see you all soon, hyungs!" Jungkook said, getting up from the bench.

"Aww, so soon? But work is work," Jimin said with a sigh. "In that case, we'll stick with the plan we made for now!"

"Of course! Let me know if anything changes!" Jungkook waved, smiling at the group.

"Make sure to call me when you get back to the dorm! I want to hang out with you again," Jin said before the younger could leave.

"I promise," Jungkook smiled, feeling the warmth of his words.

"Anyways, I'll get going! Have a good day, hyungs! See you soon!" Jungkook called out, bowing deeply as he headed off.

As he walked away, he couldn't help but wonder how in the world he would make all of this work. But he was determined to give it his best shot.

Chapter Text

"Tell me, Gguk, why are we going shopping for casual clothes when you have plenty in your closet? I don't mind shopping; you know I love it! But why?" Mingyu, who is in the driver's seat of his car, asks as they head into the mall's parking lot.

"Because I can't wear the same clothes I wear as Jungkook," he replies, not fully revealing his reasons just yet. Mingyu looks at him questioningly before returning to the task of finding a parking spot.

"Is this for Ian? But you already got a lot of separate clothes for him a while ago. Why do you need more?" Mingyu asks as he finds a parking spot and maneuvers the car into it.

After he parks the car and turns off the engine, they both unbuckle their seatbelts and exit the vehicle. Mingyu locks the car as they begin to walk to the mall entrance.

"I have a lot of performance clothes, which is true. But I don't have many casual clothes that fit that style," Jungkook adds, noticing that Mingyu still seems confused.

Seeing his friend's puzzled expression, Jungkook realizes he hasn't been explicit enough. 

"Okay, I'll just say it outright so you stop looking at me like you have a thousand questions. I accepted the guys' proposal to rehearse and perform with them at the upcoming party..." he spills. 

Mingyu's eyes widen as he looks at him while still walking. "You did?! So you're actually going to go through with this?" he asks, feeling a mix of happiness and concern for Jungkook, worried that others might find out.

"Yeah, I talked with my brother. After that, I took some time to think. As much as I'm terrified that they might find out and that Jin will get mad at me, I also realized that I'm willing to take the risk and put myself out there more. That's the whole point of Ian, right? To go out and do things I wouldn't do as Jungkook, in the hope that someday I can do them as just me," Jungkook smiles slightly before looking down.

"Well I think it's a good idea! I'm sure that in the future you will be able to do them as Jungkook. You already have progressed a lot gguk. I know your past has been harsh but I think you finally are coming out of your shell. Also, I don't think Jin would get mad," Mingyu replied as they entered a store they both knew. 

"Thanks, I hope so too. And I don't know. I'm hoping not but I'm not fully sure. Anyways, the new clothes are because Jin, I'm sure knows every piece of clothing I have in my closet when it comes to casual so I thought I'd finally but something with colors to differentiate from the white and black that I wear," he goes and looks at some blue and green t shirts. 

"That's a good idea! You should also wear less big and loose clothes. You mainly wear them lose and that's a sign of you as Jungkook, so something of this size!" He pulls up a medium shirt and puts it on Jungkook on top to see how it would look. 

"To make the difference!" Mingyu smiles. 

"Good idea! Let's do that then. But anyways yeah. One thing that I am worried about though is that my professor wants Jimin hyung and I to help tutor the others in art and photography. So, besides practicing with them as Ian. I'll also be tutoring them as myself and I really don't know how I'll do it but I'm hoping for the best," he spills and Mingyu looks at him in worried. 

Although he's certain his friend can handle doing both, it still worried him that it could end up being hard for the other to be with them in different ways. 

"You will be tutoring them? How will the schedule work out then? I'm sure you can hassle multiple stuff on your schedule but won't it be tiring from going from Ian to yourself constantly? How have you not freaked out yet?"Mingyu asked as they went to the sweatpants section. 

"I'm sure it will be kind of tiring but I chose it so I have to suck it up. Also yes I've freaked out but hyung told me to try to just think on the positive and not overthink so that's what I've been trying to do though I'm nervous as fuck," he frowns. He had freaked out a little as he expected of himself once he got him and realized the choices he made but he had called his brother once more for advice. 

"Hmm I'm nervous for you but maybe everything will be fine. Just don't pressure yourself much in other stuff, yes?" Mingyu put a hand on his shoulder. 

"I'll try," he smiled back and after choosing some shirts and sweatpants they went to the cashier to check out. 

"I'm also tutoring them because I feel bad and I'll have a good excuse to hang with them. It will have people judge me or them less, though I guess after the party I started to think less of what people think of me hanging with them. Not of me though, I'm still insecure but at least I'm slowly becoming better at not caring when I'm with them," jungkook spoke as he passed the credit card on the pad. 

"Wait, really? You aren't starting to care anymore about what people think about you hanging with them?" Mingyu asked hopeful and with excitement. He always hoped to hear Jungkook say that. 

His friend had been self conscious for so long after having people negatively comment when he first had met the other hyungs, but to see him improving and wanting to hang with his hyungs despite what people would say was a big step. 

"Not fully, but I'm trying to not care anymore. Also I realized that if I want to be confident as Jungkook, I have to do things out of my comfort zone as Jungkook and not just Ian too. Also, that day at the club...the hyungs made it clear that they don't care and that I shouldn't care either so I'm trying for my sake even if it's hard," he admits a little proudly and shy to Mingyu who smiles and puts an arm around his shoulders as they head out the store. 

It was true though, after talking to his brother, talking with Jin and the hyungs during the club time he realized that it was time to put fears behind and give things a go as Jungkook even if prettified him. 

He really wanted to leave his past in the past so to do that he needed to move on. Though this doesn't mean he's fully confident and nonchalant, no, he still has a long way to go but it's a start. And he's sure becoming Ian has also helped him in that sense. 

"Makes me happy! Just for that I'll invite you to food after we head to the next store! I'm proud of you friend," Mingyu punches him slightly as they laugh heading to another store. 

A few days later

A few days have passed and the time to start the first tutoring session had come. Everyone was looking forward to it, but now that they were reunited in the small class that the younger had arranged for them to meet they couldn't help but start to feel a bit guilty. 

They truly wondered if the younger was okay with the whole thing. They didn't want him doing it just for kindness or because he felt forced. Yes, the thought of spending time with him made them all happy but still. 

"Please stop making those faces! I know you all feel a little guilty like I do, but I'm sure Jungkookie didn't agree to this out of kindness or because he felt forced. I genuinely believe he wants to help us and spend time with us in a way that others can't judge him for," Jin broke the silence after noticing the expressions on everyone's faces. He understood what they were thinking; he knew each of them well enough to recognize their subtle signs and antics.

That being said, he still felt guilty himself. He couldn't shake off the guilt, but he realized this was the only way Jungkook would agree to hang out with them. He believed that through these tutoring sessions, Jungkook would gradually become comfortable with the group and no longer feel uneasy about spending time with them.

Moreover, despite the rejections and mixed comments, Jungkook genuinely wanted to hang out and be friends with them. Jin knew this from the countless questions he would ask whenever Jin mentioned anything about the group, always eager to hear about their outings.

So, in the end, this was beneficial for both of them.

"I agree with Jin hyung. He knows him best out of all of us!" Taehyung remarked as he looked up from his phone.

"And if we still feel bad about it, we can always clear things up with him when he arrives, right?" he added.

"True," several of them chimed in.

"Hey, guys! I'm here!" Jungkook announced as he arrived, but he immediately panicked when he saw that everyone was already there.

"I didn't make you wait too long, did I? Was I late? Were we supposed to meet earlier?" he began to fret. He walked to the front of the table to sit down and set up his materials.

"No, Jungkookie! Don't worry!" Hobi waved his hand dismissively.

"You're only two minutes late! We just arrived too early," Jin reassured him with a smile.

"Oh, okay! In that case, are you all ready?" Jungkook asked, adjusting his glasses as he looked up at them.

"Yup, we are, but we do have one small concern lingering," Namjoon raised one finger.

Jungkook furrowed his brows, "What are you guys worried about?"

"Are you truly okay with this, Jungkook? We can't help but feel bad about it. You're spending time teaching us two subjects that maybe we should be learning on our own," Yoongi said, crossing his arms.

Jungkook smiled at them, wishing they wouldn't worry so much. Although he would have less free time with club practices, parties, and other commitments, he didn't mind; he wanted to help them.

"Yes, please don't worry at all! I'm doing this because I really want to help you all, not because I feel forced or anything. It doesn't take up much of my weekly schedule. Plus, I have Jimin hyung to support me," he assured them.

"Seriously, don't worry. I know what I'm getting into and I really don't mind. I'm sure you guys will catch on quickly," he smiled warmly, hoping they believed him because it was the truth.

"You heard him, guys! Trust me, he means what he says, okay?" Jin stood up and placed a hand on the youngest's shoulder.

Jungkook kept his smile and nodded in agreement with Jin's words.

"Okay, we just wanted to be sure," Yoongi replied.

"Alright, let's get started, shall we?" Jungkook asked, and they all nodded in unison. Jin patted Jungkook's back before returning to sit with the others.

"I have some feedback from the professor on your improvement areas," Jungkook started, glancing at the email on his screen.

"It looks like many of you are having difficulties with art, so I'll begin there. I'll dedicate the last portion of our session to photography," he adjusted his glasses that had slipped down.

The others stared at him, impressed as he shifted from an informal to a more formal tone, sounding almost like a relaxed professor.

"However, I believe it's beneficial for each of you to mention your specific challenges. This way, I can identify common issues and focus on those skills. So," he looked at them, "what aspects of art do you find most difficult?"

"For Hoseok and me, shading is our biggest hurdle. We can never quite achieve the three-dimensional look our work needs," Namjoon volunteered first.

Jungkook nodded while typing on his computer. 

"Yeah, just shading and making our art realistic. We also have difficulty with color application," Hoseok added.

"Alright, let's move on to photography. What particular challenges do you face?" Jungkook asked, directing his gaze at Jin and Yoongi.

"Actually, before you respond, Hyung, if you were struggling with photography, you could have mentioned it earlier. Why didn't you?" Jungkook asked the eldest, who momentarily paused.

Though he really didn't require much assistance with photography, the aspects he wanted to enhance weren't significant enough to address with the younger one beforehand. But...

"Absolutely, Jungkookie. Regarding art, I think we should revisit black and white first, and then gradually reintroduce the color aspect to the hyungs," Jimin suggested while looking at the notes on Jungkook's computer. 

"For Jin and Yoongi we could start with a refresh on the color basics for editing and then go on with the rest. It all seems very easy stuff to work with," Taehyung nods and smiles. 

"Great! Let's get started then!" Jungkook comments and begins to first teach art with Jimin and then photography with Taehyung. 

Since he began by explaining his own artistic approach rather than that of the professor, hoping everyone would grasp it better. He guided the others through a drawing he was creating, focusing on shading techniques. Jimin took the time to clarify the techniques Jin and Yoongi were using and pointed out their mistakes.

Once they completed their work, they shared it with the two youngest, who were impressed by their efforts. After feeling satisfied with their progress for the day, they transitioned to photography, with Taehyung initially stepping in to cover the fundamentals of color.

Although the youngest could have taken on that role, Taehyung believed it was fair for him to enjoy a brief break. Nevertheless, the younger members demonstrated real-time examples of what Taehyung had explained.

After three hours, they concluded the session, feeling content with how much they had accomplished in such a short time.

The boys recognized that they still had room for improvement but were mindful not to put too much pressure on themselves, understanding that mastering these skills takes time. They were pleased to have grasped the younger member's methods, which was a significant achievement.

"I guess that marks the end of the session! You all did great! With a few more sessions and practice, I think you'll really get the hang of it!" Jungkook said as he powered down his computer and projector.

"We hope it was helpful, hyungs!" Jimin chimed in as he took a seat in a chair.

"It was! Your teamwork in teaching, especially considering it was improvised, was impressive!" Hoseok praised them, glancing at the other three.

"I agree! We've got a long way to go, but you all taught us far better than the professor! Your methods were so much easier!" Yoongi replied, putting his drawing into a folder and stowing it in his backpack.

"But I feel like Jungkook was the real lead teacher here. You knew exactly when to start and guided most of it! Sure, we contributed too, but the way you presented it was fantastic. You felt like a real professor, but a fun and relaxed one!" Taehyung commented, giving the younger a light squeeze on the shoulder.

Jungkook blushed slightly and smiled at the remark.

"I agree! You were excellent! I'm certain that in a few weeks, we will all improve significantly, and it's all thanks to you three! Though Jungkookie really sounded like a pro!" Namjoon added his praises.

Jin smiled, feeling satisfied. This is what he had hoped to see. 

"Thanks!" Jungkook rubs his neck.  

"I don't see myself as a professor, but I appreciate the compliments! You both performed just as well!" He turns to the other two youngest members.  

"You guys made it easier for me, hyungs!" he adds, wanting them to receive more recognition.  

"Of course, all of you did great!" Jin says, standing up after cleaning up his things. He walks over to the youngest and puts an arm around his shoulder.  

"This kid has always been a natural teacher, and those two—" he points at Jimin and Taehyung.  

"—are just as talented! Now, I think we could all use some food, right? I'm starving... my treat! Who's in?" Jin asks.  

"You don't even need to ask; you're coming!" Jin tells the youngest, who shakes his head and rolls his eyes, knowing there's no escape. Though he didn't really mind, he still felt shy.  

"I know," he answers, adjusting his glasses.  

"You heard the man! What about everyone else?" Jin asks again.  

"What kind of question is that, hyung? Of course, we're all in! How about some BBQ?" Hoseok suggests.  

Everyone nods in agreement.  

"Great! But let's not overdo it on drinks since we all drove here. Well, everyone except me. I didn't feel like driving today," Jin remarks. 

""Wait, you brought your car, right, gguk? Or is it still at the dealer's?" he asked the younger one. He had been the one giving rides since Jungkook's car was in the shop, but now that it's finished, he could get rides from the youngest instead.

"Hmm, yeah. I just got it back today. You can either crash at my place or head back home!" Jungkook responded, picking up his backpack.

"I'll crash at your place!" the oldest quickly replied, leaving the youngest's side to grab his stuff.

"Okay, so Jin is with Jungkookie. I'll drive Jimin, and Hoseok and Taehyung will be with Namjoon!" Yoongi added.

"That works for me! However, Tae has something to do with his parents after dinner. If it's okay with you, can I get a ride, Jungkookie? Your place is close to mine, based on what Jin hyung told me," Namjoon asked the younger, who nodded.

"You don't have your license yet, hyung?" the youngest asked innocently.

"This guy would be a danger on the road! He should never get a license!" Jin exclaimed dramatically, prompting the other to roll his eyes.

The others giggled at his outburst.

"He's not terrible, but his clumsiness means he shouldn't drive yet," Jimin remarks, giving a comforting pat to the oldest, who exhales with a sigh.  

"Not terrible?" the youngest smiles, clearly entertained by the situation.  

"For everyone's safety, it's better that I don't drive. I definitely want to eventually, but for now, I'm fine with riding my bike or getting lifts!" Namjoon replies, somewhat bashfully.  

"I can give you a ride, hyung!"  

"Awesome! Thanks, Gguk! It's just for the return trip; Taehyungie will take me to the location first,"  

"Alright, is everyone set?" Hoseok inquired, scanning the room to ensure everyone had their belongings.  

"I believe so! Let's go!" Taehyung answered, and they all exited the classroom and entered the parking lot. On their way there, they engaged in light conversation, except for Jungkook, who watched with amusement, knowing the shyness would fade gradually.  

They reached their cars and drove to the restaurant, arriving shortly and finding a table that accommodated all seven of them.  

They proceeded to order some drinks and their meats. A few minutes later they had gotten their beers and sodas. 

"Ah, that's the good stuff!" Yoongi sets the bottle of alcohol down.  

"The smell is heavenly too!" Tae points out as he glances around at the other tables filled with food.  

Suddenly, the waitress enters with all the meats. Everyone gets excited at the sight of the fresh marbled meat.  

Jungkook is about to put some on the grill when someone else beats him to it with the tongs instead.  

"It's okay, Jungkook-ah. You and the other two youngsters have already done your part by teaching us today! Now it's time for us to dig in with the food!" Namjoon, who is sitting across from the younger ones, comments as he piles all the possible meat on the grill.  

"Oh, are you sure, hyung? It's fine, really?"  

"It is! Trust me. I may not be great at cooking many things, but at least I can grill meat!" He looks up and smiles at him. Jungkook smirks and takes a sip of his soda.  

He would go for a beer instead, but since he's driving, he decides against it.  

"Guess I'll let you then!" The boy sweeps his hair back a bit.  

"So, Jungkook! How's life been? We hear from Jin, but he doesn't share much to keep your stuff private. Has school been okay?" Jimin asks.  

"Since you're tutoring us, we'd love to know a bit more about you that isn't from hyung's mouth—basically, you'd be more entertaining!" He adds, laughing when he hears a "hey" complaint from their oldest hyung.  

"But you don't have to, of course, if you don't want to!"  

"I guess it's not a bad idea since we'll be spending more time together. How much do you guys know about me?" The younger asks, grabbing his drink and taking a sip. 

"They only know what you've mentioned during the few times we've all hung out. They're aware that I primarily look after you since your brother lives in London and your parents are often away. That's pretty much it," Jin responds before anyone else can add anything.

So, they genuinely didn't know much.

"Oh well, my life isn't that exciting, so I'm not sure if what I share will be enjoyable," he says with a frown. He really didn't believe his life was interesting. He mostly spent time with friends when everyone was free, and the rest of his time was consumed by studying.

He did secretly practice music, but being Ian was the only part of his life that felt thrilling.

"Our lives aren't that exciting either, gguk! I know it doesn't look that way, but besides college events, we mostly practice, make music, dance, or hang out," Jimin explains with a shrug. He understands that their public persona suggests a glamorous life, but to them, it feels quite ordinary.

"It really doesn't sound boring at all. You guys create music and dance! That's got to be more exciting than what I do," Jungkook comments, a small smile on his face. He couldn't comprehend how that could be mundane.

"So, what do you do, Jungkookie?" Yoongi asks, crossing his arms on the table.

"Ah... Well, I focus on school and study hard? I enjoy playing games in my spare time, and I also like taking photos when I get the chance, but I haven't done much of that lately. I love trying out different restaurants and I work here now and then. Oh, and I can play a bit of piano, but mostly I just study, game, and work," he replies, thanking Namjoon as he adds some meat to his plate.

"That's not exciting for you?! You play piano and try out various foods! Gaming can also be thrilling! I don't see how you find it dull, Jungkookie," Namjoon shakes his head, causing Jungkook to blush a bit.

"To me, it doesn't feel like much at all!" He shrugs and takes a bite of lettuce wrapped around meat and rice.

He moans, savoring the delicious, juicy meat, then catches himself feeling embarrassed about his reaction.

Seokjin chuckles. "If he moans, groans, or makes a face, it means he's enjoying the food, by the way!" he comments. 

"Sorry, but he's right," Jungkook speaks and put another bite. He was feeling hungry. 

"It's good to see you eat well! Also very cute may I add!" Taehyung comments with a smile as he puts his own piece of meat in his mouth.

"Okay, now tell us more on what you like, what you want to do in the future...anything you wish to share!" Hobi adds in. 

"Okay," Jungkook says and with that he has started sharing some more details of his life, thoughts, and hobbies with the others. They seemed to listen and be very involved with his responses; he was grateful for that. 

After an hour, he unconsciously shifted the topic, and they were once again discussing the upcoming party. They were trying to persuade the younger crowd to join them.

"I'm just not too fond of parties? I mean things like the club and all are small, so I don't mind that much, but this is a campus party. I know it's a masked event, but I don't know. I'll think about it...maybe I will in the end..." he shrugs after being begged for 15 minutes. If he hadn't agreed to help them as Ian or if he had been honest from the start, he would have said yes, but it didn't work that way.

He will be there... just no one will know it's him.

"And how's it going with Ian? Have you guys started practice yet?" he asked as if he didn't know anything, taking a sip of the water he had requested. Most of them had finished their food.

"We don't start until tomorrow! We have the days set aside, though. Tomorrow is just going to be a meeting to decide what theme we want for the show and then go from there. We're also thinking of creating our own songs to perform since it's been a while, so we want to see if he's onboard for that," Taehyung explains while downing the rest of the beer in his bottle.

"You guys want to do your own original performance for the show? So, like record, dance, all that?" he asked, feeling surprised. He never expected the others to want to create something original; he thought they would just work on covers.

Although performing something original was cool and exciting, he couldn't shake the nervousness that they might discover who he was and get mad. Just practicing dance was easier, but recording, among other things, made it different. He'd have to mask his voice more, which he could manage, but he imagined it would get tiring.

"Yes! We'll do one cover song and then go straight into performing our original songs! We plan to do just two original songs, though, but Yoongi and Namjoon have already created the lyrics and production. There's just one small area that needs to be cleaned up from the production!" Hoseok explains to the youngest, who immediately relaxes upon hearing the songs are finished.

He liked composing but didn't know how he'd be of any help to the others if they were to ask him as Ian.

"Oh really? They're done?" 

"Yes, we just need to distribute the lines and record them because I also am going to use the tracks for a project in production class! From then on, Hoseok along with one of our professors will help with the choreography!" Jin adds. 

"Oh wow. That's cool, sounds like you have everything planned. Almost as if you all were idols! I bet you guys would make good idols!" Jungkook compliments them. 

"Thanks gguk! But really we did this for less stress when we get near! We also like to be organized. We just hope that Ian is okay with these arrangements. We need his input too of course!" Jimin wipes his mouth. 

The youngest smiles. They were all very thoughtful. "I feel like Ian will be okay with what you guys are doing! I hope you guys have fun working with him, hyungs!" 

"We hope too! Of course, it won't be as fun as hanging with you," hobi teased the younger either a smile. 

Jungkook chuckles. "It's okay, I wouldn't get jealous! Or feel left out. I understand," he waves his hand because either way it's him who's hanging with them. 

"Still we don't want you to feel like this will make a dent in tutoring or getting to know you! Not at all!" Jin replies. 

"Anyways it's getting late! Should we head out?" Taehyung looked at his phone. He needed to meet up with his parents in 1 hour. 

"Yes, let's ask for the check!" Jungkook says and puts his hand up to ask for the bill. 

The waitress comes not long after. "I'll pay guys! It's on me today!" Jin says, getting out his card, not letting anyone else pay. 

"Hyung really?" Namjoon asked. 

"Let him hyung! I just let him pay for my food when he offers! Don't fight it!" Jungkook finds it in him to tease Jin with the others. 

"Yah! I'm just a bank or wallet to you am I not?" Jin complains, earning a giggle from the younger who shrugs. 

Despite the tone of his comment, both of them knew that the older man didn't mind paying for the younger one. After all, he wasn't short on money.

He took out his wallet and placed his credit card on top of the receipt. The waitress, quick to notice the scene, came over and collected the check along with the card.

They continued chatting for a bit until the waitress returned with another receipt and the card.

"Thank you!" Jin said, taking his card and placing it back in his wallet.

"So, are we all done?" Yoongi asked, and the others nodded. They immediately got up from their chairs and walked towards the exit, heading to the parking lot where their cars were parked.

"Well, I guess our fun and studious evening has come to an end..." Jimin said, sounding somewhat dejected. They had all enjoyed the tutoring session and the outing afterward. The fact that Jungkook had joined them was a big bonus, too.

"It is, but we have school again tomorrow and the big day with Ian," Yoongi replied.

"Anyways, I should head out to my parents' place, but I'll see you guys tomorrow!" Taehyung said as he quickly glanced at his phone. He then put the phone back in his pocket and turned to the younger boy.

"Jungkookie! It was fun being with you today! I hope you had fun too," he said, pulling Jungkook in for a side hug. Jungkook smiled and hugged him back a little awkwardly.

"I did! I had a lot of fun with the tutoring and eating with you all..." Jungkook replied, trying to make eye contact with everyone as he spoke.

"That's good to hear. Anyway, I'll see you at school! Drive safely and let us know if Jin-hyung gives you any trouble," Taehyung winked, making Jungkook laugh while Jin rolled his eyes.

"See you, Taehyung-hyung!" Jungkook called out.

"We should head out too! Have a good night, everybody! Jungkookie, you have our number, so don't forget to hit us up even on days when we don't have tutoring!" Hoseok said, pulling out his car keys.

"I'll try!" Jungkook replied.

Everyone soon started saying their goodbyes and left for their cars. Meanwhile, Jin and Namjoon walked over to Jungkook's car.

"So, Namjoon-hyung, where do you and Taehyung-hyung live? I need to put the address in the GPS," Jungkook asked once everyone was settled in the car. Jin was in the passenger seat on his phone while Namjoon was in the back.

"Here, let me send it to you so it shows up on the car screen," Namjoon replied, sending his address.

"Okay, got it!" Jungkook said as he set up the GPS.

"Everything is set! We can head out now!" Jungkook announced, backing out of the parking space. Soon enough, they were driving off.

"Hmm, today was a lot of fun. I know I just said that, but it was! Finally, I'm slowly getting my wish," Jin said with a big smile on his face. Jungkook chuckled, shaking his head after quickly glancing at Jin and then back at the road.

"It really was! I hope we can keep having this much fun during tutoring and spending time together. We've all looked forward to hanging out with you, Jungkookie. Ever since the moment we met you—or rather, since Jin first mentioned you—we felt an urge to meet you," Namjoon explained.

"Really? You guys looked forward to it that much?" Jungkook asked, quickly glancing at the rearview mirror to make eye contact with Namjoon, who nodded.

Jungkook felt shy again; their compliments always made him feel a bit bashful.

"Yeah, Jin has always said only good things about you. Meeting you and seeing that what he said was true was even better. I hope you can hang out with us more from now on. We promise we don't care what others say. I know it's repetitive, but it's true. You shouldn't care either. I know that's not easy, but what matters is what we think, not what others think," Namjoon added, as Jungkook nodded and stayed quiet for a brief moment.

"You're right, it is hard, but that's why I'm trying to change that about myself. Slowly but surely, I hope to get to where I want to be," he replied with a soft smile.

"I hope he listens to you about that. I can see that you're making an effort, Jungkookie," Jin commented after letting the other two speak.

"Anyway, I think we're here now," Jungkook said as he pulled over to the curb.

"Yup, this is my place. Well, I better get some rest. I'll see you guys tomorrow! Hope you have a good night, and don't drink too much!" Namjoon warned before getting out of the car.

"We will! See you tomorrow, Namjoon-ah!" Jin answered back.

"See ya, Namjoon hyung," Jungkook followed, waving goodbye.

He watched as Namjoon waved back and closed the door. They both stayed there for a moment, watching him go inside. Once they lost sight of him, Jungkook restarted the car.

"Ready, hyung?" Jungkook asked, to which Jin nodded.

"You're already sleepy, huh?" Jungkook chuckled softly at Jin's droopy eyes.

"Yeah, it's been a long day. So, drive fast! I want to get to my room and sleep," Jin whined, closing his eyes and leaning against the window.

"You mean my guest room that you've turned into your room lately?"

"Oh please, you've done the same with mine in my apartment. Just drive!" Jin gestured, and Jungkook shook his head but complied.

Jungkook was extremely nervous. The day had finally arrived when he would meet and start rehearsing with the other boys for the party. He was scared of being discovered and worried that they might find out who he really was during their time together. However, he couldn't back down now; he had already made a commitment and didn't want to appear like a coward by going back on his word.

He sighed as he looked at himself in the mirror while putting on a bucket hat, pushing his hair back to keep it from falling into his face. Wearing his new practice clothes and without his glasses, he had initially not intended to wear the bucket hat, but he decided it might provide an extra layer of protection for his identity. The hat also partially obscured his eyes. With a mask on, he hoped he wouldn't be recognized at all.

Jin had gone home earlier in the day, so Jungkook didn't have to worry about changing in a hidden spot in his apartment. 

"I can do this. You already decided, Jeon Jungkook," he said to himself in the mirror, taking a deep breath. He then grabbed his keys and mask before heading out.

After getting into his car and leaving the parking lot, it took Jungkook just 15 minutes to arrive on campus. He chose to park far away to avoid being noticed by the others.

He grabbed his bag, put on his mask, and walked toward the studio where he assumed the others had already arrived. Knowing them, they were likely early for their tutoring session, just as they would be for this rehearsal. 

Taking a deep breath, he locked his car and made his way to the studio, the chosen meeting place for the group.

As he approached the door, he could feel his heart racing with nerves. He took a quick peek inside and confirmed his suspicion: everyone was already there. He glanced at his watch and realized he was three minutes early.

Taking a deep breath, he prepared to knock and then stepped inside.

"Um, hello," he said in a tone that was different from his usual voice. Everyone turned to look at him and smiled. He bowed slightly, and they bowed back.

"I hope I didn't arrive too late?" he asked.

"Oh no! You're actually..." Jin checked his watch. 

"Three minutes early. We got here a bit earlier because we felt nervous and didn't want to be late," the oldest member explained.

"Don't worry. Honestly, I'm a little nervous too," he replied, though he was much more than just a little nervous.

"Then I guess we'll have to get over it together! It's good to see you again, Ian!" Yoongi said with a slight smile.

"It's great to see you all as well!" Ian, the youngest boy, responded.

"Thank you for coming today, Ian! Is it okay if we just call you Ian?" Namjoon asked, to which Ian nodded.

"Great! Let's get started! I'm sure you're wondering why we're meeting in a studio instead of a practice room, right?" the leader began.

"A little," Ian lied; he fully understood why they were in a studio rather than a dance room.

"Well, we didn't bring this up during our first meeting, but it's something we thought about only a day and a half ago. We want this performance to be very professional. Instead of covering existing songs, we thought it would be better to perform original songs and record them, with help for the backtrack in certain areas," Namjoon explained as the others listened attentively, nodding along.

"We've actually already written two songs that would fit the theme of the party. However, we wanted to check with you first to see if you would still be willing to perform with us. I know this is more than we initially planned, but we wanted to discuss it with you first. We understand if this is too much," Hoseok added, his tone hinting at a small sense of guilt.

Jungkook pretended to think things over.

"So, you guys have the songs written and produced already, right?" he asked.

"Yes, we do! You can listen to them first if you want," Taehyung replied.

"Sure, if possible," he nodded, and Namjoon smiled, tapping Yoongi on the shoulder to play the song demos.

"Okay, the first one is called 'Blood, Sweat, and Tears,' and the next one will be 'Fake Love.' We've created a small guide for both to show how the lyrics will be sung. I'll play it now," Yoongi explained, and the others nodded.

The song began immediately, with Jimin's vocals starting off the guide. From the very first beats, Jungkook could tell that the song would sound dark and mysterious—exactly what a masquerade party should feel like. He unconsciously bobbed his head to the beat as he listened.

The song was amazing. He smiled; how could it not be? Everything these guys did was incredible in his eyes. They all had undeniable talent.

He could easily envision the performance as the song continued. The build-up to the chorus created a dramatic effect, while the combination of slow and fast-paced sections made the song even more engaging.

The others stole glances at him throughout the song, eager to see his reaction. Watching him bop his head made them feel happy and content; they wanted him to enjoy the songs.

"So, what do you think?" Namjoon asked when the last beat played.

They all looked at Ian, anticipating his response. While his physical reactions indicated that he liked the song, they were hoping for a verbal affirmation.

"I love it! I really like how the song switches between fast and slow tempos. Let's go with this one; it's amazing and fits the party's theme perfectly. The guide is great as well," he said brightly, causing everyone to let out a sigh of relief.

"Hmm, that's good! We hope you like the next song too. This one is 'Fake Love!'" Namjoon said, looking at Ian as he pressed play on the second track.

Jungkook widened his eyes at the first few seconds of the song. The contrast between the two songs shocked him. While this one also had a dark vibe like "Blood, Sweat, and Tears," it was different in a special way. It was infused with more emotion.

The song featured a hint of electro-pop blended with rock. This time, Namjoon's voice was the guide, mostly in a rap tone throughout. The lyrics also had a deeper meaning compared to the first song.

Once again, he was blown away by their creativity and immense talent. Although he secretly composed and wrote some songs of his own, he felt that none could compare to how remarkable the hyungs' music was—they were on another level altogether.

As the beat finished, Jungkook stood in shock. The others couldn't see his surprise because of his mask and bucket hat, but his nodding after the song indicated that he liked it.

"Wow, it's true what everyone says about you guys. I already believed it, but now I'm once again reminded in person just how good you are as artists. These songs are amazing," Ian complimented, a hint of awe in his voice.

"So, you like them?" Jin asked for reassurance.

"I do," he nodded.

Everyone else smiles, some nodding in agreement.

"Alright, if you're on board with performing and recording these songs, let me hand out the lyric sheets," Hoseok says as he retrieves copies from a folder in his backpack. He then distributes the two sheets of lyrics to the six boys in the room, who immediately start studying them.

"Now, we just need to decide who gets what. How will we do that?" Jimin asks.

"Well, why don't we each sing or rap the verses and chorus and see who fits which parts? We could go from there... if that's okay with everyone," Jungkook suggests, diverting some of his gaze from the lyrics to the others.

"That works! Let's get started then!" Namjoon gestures for everyone to come forward, and they each begin to sing their assigned parts of both songs. Jungkook feels a bit nervous every time it's his turn, but he gradually becomes more comfortable.

After 30 minutes, they have already noted down who will sing what. However, as Jungkook reviews his lyric sheet, he realizes that he has the most lines in both songs, especially in "Blood Sweat and Tears."

"Looking at the parts after distribution, I've ended up with a lot of lines. I didn't realize I was getting more while we took turns. Is it okay for me to have more than some of you? You all sing and rap just as well or better than I do," he asks, tilting his head.

Seeing Jungkook tilt his head, Jin can't help but notice how similar it is to Ian's head tilt. The younger always tilts his head that way when he's unsure or confused about something. Maybe it's something other people do too that he hadn't noticed until now.

"That's because you fit the parts better than anyone else, Ian. You have a lot of talent. You're just as talented as the rest of us. No one said anything during distribution, so none of us have a problem with how many lines you have or we have, unless it's an issue for you?" Yoongi asks, concerned that they might have given him too much.

"No! No!" Ian shakes his head emphatically.

"I agreed to it; it's fine for me. I was just asking in case any of you wanted more lines," he explains.

"It's alright, Ian. We are content and actually happy with our distribution. We've never divided a song this quickly among us, let alone two. Everything is fine. We gave you more parts for a reason," Jimin tries to reassure the boy, who slowly nods.

"Alright, then we can start recording, right? Since you have the most parts, why don't we begin with a rough recording of 'Blood Sweat and Tears'?" Namjoon looks at Ian. The sooner they start recording, the better.

"Uhh, sure, I can head into the studio first," Jungkook responds confidently, even though he feels a growing sense of pressure inside.

"Okay! Great! If you want some privacy, we can dim the lights on our side in case you want to take off your mask," Hoseok comments while adjusting the studio lights.

"Oh, yeah, that's fine. Thank you," he replies softly. He appreciates that they're not pressuring him to reveal himself if he doesn't want to.

He grabs a water bottle and heads into the studio. As he puts on the headphones and lays the lyric sheet on the stand, he realizes that he has never recorded anything before. This is his first time, but he doesn't want to reveal that to the hyungs.

He's sure they'll assume that someone like Ian has recorded before, but that isn't the truth.

"Okay, Ian, can you hear me?" Yoongi speaks into the mic.

"Yes," Jungkook replies.

"Alright, I'm sure someone like you has recorded before to some extent, but it's always good to remind everyone of the structure. You'll hear the metronome and the instrumental in your headphones. Sing into the mic, and if you want to do something again, you can stop and ask to redo it. If we have any feedback, we'll stop you instead," Yoongi explains, getting everything ready.

"Sounds good. We can start!" Jungkook says, feeling a bit shaken.

He's relieved that Yoongi took the time to explain how recording works. He hopes the instructions will help him avoid messing up or feeling lost during the session.

"Okay, let's start," Namjoon says this time.

The other four boys sit on the couch behind the producers, feeling excited to watch Ian begin his recording.

The beat started, and Jungkook took a breath as he allowed the song's guide to cover the first half of the introduction.

My Blood sweat, tears, and my cold breath

Take it all away 

He sang looking at the window and seeing Namjoon give him a thumbs up and stop the song. 

"That was great! Let's redo it one more time to have an extra copy!" Yoongi spoke into the mic. 

Jungkook nodded giving them another thumbs up. 

That wasn't so bad. 

He looked at the song sheet as he heard the song restart. He sings his line one more time. 

'"Okay, great! Now let's move on to the next section, which is part of the pre-chorus," Namjoon said this time.

"Sounds good," Jungkook replied, trying not to sound too nervous. They continued recording his parts, which took only an hour and a half to complete, with only two corrections made so far. All that was left for the younger member was the bridge.

"Okay, you've been doing great, Ian! Why don't you take a little water break before we tackle that very high bridge?" Hobi suggested. Ian nodded, giving them a thumbs-up as he started to open his water bottle.

"So, what do you guys think of him? He's amazing, isn't he? We've made only a few corrections," Namjoon turned in his chair to ask the others, who nodded, impressed by the whole process.

"It's been almost an hour and a half, and he's pretty much done with his parts. He follows instructions with such ease; it's wow! His voice is incredible!" Jin complimented.

"Right? I'm actually starting to think it would be best if he did the ad-libs too; his voice fits these songs so well. Maybe he is what we needed all along," Taehyung added with a smile.

"He really is a talent. The fact that this is going so smoothly is a good sign," Namjoon nodded.

"I think he should do the ad-libs too, but let's wait until each of us has a turn before we mention it to him and see if he agrees. He might really be what we need," Hoseok nodded in agreement and smiled as they turned back to their work.

"I wonder if Jungkookie would have been just as good if he had accepted," Jimin said as he reached for a water bottle next to Taehyung, accidentally knocking Ian's bag over in the process.

"Oops, my bad! He's that good," Jimin apologized.

"It's okay, Chin, I got it," Taehyung replied, picking up the water bottle first and handing it to Jimin. He then went on to gather the contents that had fallen out of Ian's bag. While picking some things up, he noticed that the keys on the floor had the same keychain as Jungkook's from yesterday, and the car keys were for the same model car.

"What does this mean?" Taehyung pondered as he shook his head and put the keys away. He zipped the bag closed once more.

"Everything okay, Tae?" Jin asked, noticing the puzzled expression on the younger male's face.

"Ah, yes, Hyung! I'm sorry; I just started wondering if I left something on back in my apartment. But I remember that I didn't, so don't worry." He quickly forced a smile.

Though in reality, he had a number of questions racing through his mind.

Chapter Text

Jungkook thought it was amazing how much could be accomplished in just five hours as he saw the last member—Jin, to be exact — come out of the recording booth. Once he started recording, the others followed suit. One by one, they would enter, record their parts, and then exit, repeating the process.

Jungkook had expected it to take more than a day to finish recording everything, but to his surprise, they had completed all the main sections of the first song. The only parts left were the ad-libs. He didn’t yet know who would be recording those sections, but little did he realize that everyone was thinking of him for most of the hidden vocals.

While watching each member go in and record, he made small talk with them, but they were all primarily focused on the recording process.

“Okay, let’s take a break and get some water. How about a 15-minute break? Then we can come back and listen to how the song sounds so far before moving on to the ad-libs,” Namjoon said, turning around from his chair and looking a little tired.

“That works for me! My throat is starting to hurt a bit. I can’t imagine how it will feel for the next song,” Jimin replied, rubbing his throat.

“I’ll go get us some drinks! Is everyone okay with water?” Taehyung asked as he got up.

Everyone nodded in agreement.

“Okay, I will be right back then!” he says before leaving.

“So, Ian, we have something we’d like to discuss with you,” Namjoon speaks softly, grabbing the attention of the other male who was focused on his phone.

“Yes?” Ian asks, curiosity evident in his tone.

“As we were recording, we were trying to determine whose tone would suit the ad-libs for this song best. Everyone did well, but we think that your voice, along with Jimin's and Hoseok's, would really tie everything together!” Namjoon places a hand on Hoseok's shoulder, smiling.

“Our question is: Would you be willing to do the ad-libs? It doesn’t have to be today; we can schedule it for another day if you agree. We just really love your voice, and your hidden talents could amplify the others and create something even better!” Yoongi finishes, looking at Ian, who is surprised by the offer.

Did they really like his voice that much?

“Did everyone agree to this?” he asks.

“Yup, your voice is exactly what we need after Jimin's and mine. If you don’t want to do it, that’s okay too,” Hoseok adds.

Ian glances at the others in the room, who are all nodding in encouragement.

Jungkook feels hesitant; he thinks the others might be better for this song, like Jin. But if he shows doubt about his own vocals, he would be acting contrary to his confident persona as Ian.

“Well, okay. If you all believe it’s best, then why not? I don’t mind,” he says, trying to sound confident, even if he isn't entirely sure.

The others smile at him.

“I can also do it today to help us wrap everything up. We only have a month and a week left, and my voice is rested after being the first one!” he adds, nodding enthusiastically.

“Great! But are you sure about doing it today?” Namjoon asks, concerned about overworking him.

“Yes, I promise it’s okay!” jungkook assures them.

“Okay then, let’s show you which areas we want you to focus on after a short break. We’ll prepare the lyric sheet with highlighted sections for you to study,” Yoongi says with a smile as he turns to start highlighting the parts they want Ian to cover.

“Okay, sounds good!” Jungkook  replies, smiling even though they can’t see it.

“Really, Ian, you have no idea how much your voice will elevate the song. It’s already great, but these ad-libs will take it to another level!” Hoseok says, grinning as he spins his chair around.

Jungkook chuckles, and Jin suddenly looks up, finding the laugh somewhat familiar, but shakes it off—everyone can have similar laughs.

“Do you all really have that much confidence in my voice?” Jungkook asks, amused.

“I mean, I’m happy with my own vocals, but you guys make it sound like they’ll change the world of music,” he rubs the back of his neck, feeling modest.

“I don’t think you fully realize how talented you are. Your tone is unique—one we haven’t encountered before—and it fits perfectly with our sound,” Jimin says as he sits up to look at him.

“Oh, well, thank you!” Jungkokk bows his head gratefully.

Just then, the door opens slightly, and Taehyung walks in with several water bottles. “I’m here with the waters! Let me pass them out!” he says, distributing them one by one.

“Here you go, Ian!” Taehyung hands the last bottle to Jungkook, who is seated at the end of the couch. Taehyung gives him a soft yet curious look.

“Oh, thank you!” Jungkook replies, taking the bottle.

Taehyung then sits next to Ian. “So what did I miss while I was getting the waters? Did you guys tell Ian about the ad-libs?” he asks as he reclines on the big couch.

“We did, and he agreed! Here’s the lyric sheet!” Yoongi turns to hand Ian the updated sheet. Ian moves forward and grabs it, looking it over.

There are many ad-libs, but not as many as he expected.

“Okay, I’ll analyze them a bit right now!” he says, focusing intently on the sheet and the extra notes Yoongi added.

“Out of curiosity, Ian, how did you get into singing?” Taehyung asks, directing his question at him.

“Oh, I’ve been singing since I was little, actually. But it was always more of a personal hobby until now,” Jungkook replies smoothly.

Jimin frowned slightly. "You don’t seem like someone who’d keep that kind of talent hidden. You perform too confidently for that."

Jungkook chuckled and shrugged. "Performing is different. There’s a thrill to it. But I don’t really seek attention off-stage."

“Really?” Namjoon asked.

“Yeah. There are reasons why I keep myself hidden. I’m not a fan of people knowing who I am just yet. I don’t want that attention right now, but I can’t keep myself from performing,” he shrugged again.

“Interesting…” Taehyung nodded.

“Anyways, let’s leave him to analyze the lyrics, guys!” Yoongi said, feeling bad that they may have distracted him.

“Right, sorry,” one of them said.

“It’s fine! I don’t mind,” Jungkook replied but returned to studying the sheet.

The task felt a bit intense, but he knew he could handle it. Hearing Jimin and Hoseok’s ad-libs gave him a good idea of what they wanted.

“Okay, 15 minutes are up. I think I can head in now,” he spoke softly, gaining the attention of the guys who were on their phones. Those 15 minutes had passed.

“You sure?” Hoseok asked.

“Yes,” he responded, getting up.

“It’s best to wrap this up quickly!” He headed toward the booth door.

“Unless you guys need more of a break?”

“No, we are okay, right, guys?” Namjoon looked back at the others, who all gave a thumbs up.

“Alright, let’s get to it then!” Namjoon said as he shifted his gaze.

Jungkook nodded, heading back to the booth for a drink of water before putting on his headphones.

“We want something airy but controlled. Think of it like adding the final touches to a painting," he was told. Jungkook nodded slowly, scanning the highlighted parts again.

“Alright, I think I have a sense of it after seeing you guys,” he said into the mic.

As the music played, Jungkook let go of his inhibitions. His voice blended seamlessly, adding a unique texture to the song. He hit every note precisely, layering soft harmonies under the chorus that made the track feel complete. He only needed to do a few retakes.

“Okay, Ian, I think we have it!” Namjoon said enthusiastically, giving him a thumbs up.

“Okay!” Jungkook responded and took another gulp of water, feeling it refresh his throat. He could tell the others were very happy and more energized now that he had finished. He wondered if it was because they had just completed the song.

As he walked out, he received a few claps. He furrowed his eyebrows in confusion.

“You have no idea how good this sounds! We won’t say anything—just sit and listen, Ian!” Jin smiled at him, and the others nodded as they hesitantly took their seats, wondering if it truly was good.

Namjoon sat forward, excitement buzzing in his voice. “Alright, let’s hear the final mix.”

The moment the first note played, the room fell silent.

Jungkook watched them listen—the way Jin smiled when his verse came in, how Jimin swayed slightly to the melody, and how Yoongi tapped his fingers to the beat.

Then came the chorus.

Jungkook’s ad-libs drifted in softly, blending perfectly with Jimin and Hoseok’s voices, along with the rest of the group.

Jungkook’s heart thumped loudly in his ears.

When the song ended, there was a long, heavy pause, not just okay, but something that felt real, professional, and complete. He had contributed to it.

"Woah," Jimin breathed.

Jin clapped his hands together, grinning. "We actually sound like a real group..."

“We always did, but with this, it’s more complete,” he added.

“It really is amazing. We literally have almost nothing to fix—just two minor things. Good job, everyone!” Yoongi complimented them and began to clap. Everyone else joined in, even Jungkook.

“It took about six and a half hours, but we did it!” Jimin smiled.

"Alright, before we wrap up, let’s go over a few things. We started at noon, and it’s already 6 PM..." Namjoon glanced at his watch before turning his attention to Hoseok and Jimin.

"You two are handling the performance aspect—do you have a plan for the choreography? Are we starting practices now, or do we wait until we finish recording ‘Fake Love’?"

"We have to focus on ‘Fake Love’ first," Hoseok said firmly. "We can’t fall behind on recording just because we’re working on the choreography."

Namjoon nodded in agreement. "That makes sense. So, we’ll start recording ‘Fake Love’ next week while planning the choreography. You mentioned earlier that a professor’s connection is choreographing this for us, right?"

"Yeah! He should have it done in about five days," Jimin confirmed. "We’ll send him the track tomorrow once we finalize those minor adjustments."

Hoseok nodded, adding, "Since we also have tutoring with Jungkookie and our regular classes—not to mention whatever Ian has going on—"

At the mention of his name, Jungkook tensed slightly. It was subtle, but Taehyung caught it. He didn’t say anything, simply observing the reaction before shifting his attention back to the discussion.

"We can wait until the choreography is fully finalized and then have the choreographer walk us through it. Jimin and I will supervise and make any needed changes. While we wait, how about we take a four-day break before jumping into recording ‘Fake Love’?" Hoseok suggested.

"That sounds reasonable. It gives us time to recharge and focus on other responsibilities," Jin agreed.

Jungkook remained silent, offering a nod.

“Ian, is that okay with you? If not we are welcome to any new ideas!” Yoongi asked the man who shook his head right after hearing the question.

“No, I think the plan is good. It works out with my stuff too,” he nods as he responds.

“Great! So we will then text you when we can meet up! And that wraps up today’s meeting I suppose!” Namjoon looks at everybody who nods eagerly. They were ready to go eat and go home.

“Finally, that was fun but I was getting tired of sitting and standing in the booths,” Taehyung stretches after immediately getting up from the couch.

The other followed as well and stretched their limbs as much as they could. They then started gathering their own things.

“Why don’t we go and eat something? And I’m hungry and I’m sure you all are too!” Jimin suggests, tapping his stomach.

“We can eat,” Jin replies.

“Want to join us Ian? I know you can’t show your face but you can sit in a corner or something so that we don’t see you!” Hoseok tapped the males shoulder a little.

“Oh no thank you! I’m okay, I actually have something to do once I get to my place, but thank you! You guys enjoy!” He rejects the offer. He wasn’t willing to risk anything even if he truly was hungry.

“You sure?” Tae asked.

“I’m sure!” He states and packs his last item.

“Anyways, I better get going! It was a good session everybody! I had fun working with you guys and I’m looking forward to everything else!” Jungkook spoke as he was heading to the door.

“Likewise Ian! It was a great session,” Jin said. “We’re really working well together.”

“I think so too,” Jungkook agreed, moving toward the door. “Anyways, have to get going now, but I’ll see you guys soon.”

Just as he was about to leave, Yoongi called out. “Wait, Ian.”

Jungkook turned back.

“When’s your next performance at the club? We’d love to see you perform again.”

Jungkook paused briefly before answering.

"Next week, I should have another performance, so you guys can come then."

“Great! Let us know when it’s confirmed,” Namjoon said with a grin.

Jungkook nodded. “Will do.”

With that, he gave them one last wave before stepping out of the studio, the door closing softly behind him.

As soon as Jungkook left, the group finished gathering their belongings.

“Well that went extremely well. Still amazing how talented he is,” Jimin commented, leaning aging the wall.

“His voice does seem to fit with ours. It’s been a while since I felt so good after a recording session,” he added.

“I agree! I now can’t wait to see just how well he fits in performance wise with us. I think we made a great call asking him to collab with us,” Hoseok added

Jin hummed. “I just wish we knew more about him outside of music. However, I get his privacy wishes, but you can’t help but be curious.”

“Some people are like that. Yes, it can create curiosity, but it’s just understanding that some people prefer to be private,” Namjoon reasoned, taking his backpack and swinging it to one shoulder.

Taehyung, who had been quieter than usual, finally spoke. “It’s not just that.”

The others turned to him.

“He’s good at adjusting to us. Almost too good,” Taehyung mused, tapping his fingers against his water bottle. “Like he already knows how we work together, even though this is his first time recording with us.”

Jimin tilted his head. “That’s not a bad thing, though.”

“No, it’s not,” Taehyung admitted. He wasn’t suspicious—just curious. Ian felt familiar, but he couldn’t place why.

Though he wasn’t the only one. Jin felt the same way from the start but he put it to the side even in today’s meeting.

“Hey, do you think Jungkook may be up in getting some food with us since Ian can’t?” Yoongi stands up and asks Jin.

“I know we just had some dinner with him yesterday, but it wouldn’t hurt to see him again today,” He adds.

Jin nodded, “Good idea! Let me text him real quick.” He pulled out his phone and began texting the younger boy.

Meanwhile Jungkook walked through campus, feeling the cool night air brush against his skin. The session had gone smoothly, and if anything, it was going better than he had expected.

The guys liked Ian. They wanted to work with him more. That meant his plan was working.

Still, part of him felt… different. He hadn’t expected to enjoy being around them this much—not just as Ian, but as himself.

Jungkook walked through campus, feeling the cool night air brush against his skin. The session had gone smoothly, and if anything, it was going better than he had expected.

The guys liked Ian. They wanted to work with him more. That meant his plan was working. Though it was still too early to tell if it’s a complete success.

Still, part of him felt… different. He hadn’t expected to enjoy being around them this much—not just as Ian, but as himself.

Every time he hanged with them this whole week and last weekend he has felt nothing but some sense liberation, happiness, fun and so much more. He had this amount of fun with his friends, but it was slightly different than with being with the things. 

As Jungkook walked toward his car, his phone buzzed. He glanced down at the screen and felt his stomach twist slightly.

Jin: Jungkook, we’re heading out to eat. Want to come?

Jungkook froze for a second. He had just turned them down as Ian—how could he suddenly show up as Jungkook without raising suspicion?

Looking down at his outfit, he cursed internally. He was still obviously wearing Ian’s clothes. The mask was off, but if he wanted to meet them as Jungkook, he’d have to go home, change, and make sure he didn’t look like he had just walked out of a recording session.

His fingers hovered over the keyboard.

Jungkook: Actually hyung I just got home from hanging with Eunwoo and Mingyu and we ate a lot so I’m quite full. Sorry, next time?

That was a good excuse he thought or at least hoped it was.

Jin: oh I see, in that case next time for sure mister!

Jungkook: I promise hyung!

Jin: All right, well, in that case, rest well!

Jungkook: thank you hyung! You as well!

Jungkook exhaled, relieved. He picked up his pace, heading home before anyone could see him still dressed as Ian.

Everything was still under control.

For now.

He shook his head and got into the car, driving off to his apartment which has an unexpected surprise.

He jumped slightly when he opened the door, his hand instinctively going to his chest in surprise. “Oh my! You scared me! Why didn’t you guys tell me you were coming over?” His voice held a mix of surprise and mild annoyance at his friends showing up unannounced.

“I really shouldn’t have given you the code to my place,” he muttered under his breath as he walked in, taking off his bucket hat and ruffling his hair, moving towards his friends on the couch.

“We just wanted to see how things went! And we brought food!” Eunwoo grinned, standing up to approach him. “We should’ve called first, I know, but we thought it’d be a nice surprise. Plus, with how busy we’ve been this week, we hardly get to hang out anymore!”

Mingyu stood up as well, adding, “Yeah, we’ve been texting, but we definitely needed some friend time.”

“We were also curious about how your experience with Ian went with the hyung today. So we came to see! You hungry?” he asked, his tone light.

Jungkook smiled, the irritation fading as he looked at his friends. He couldn’t stay mad at them, not when they were this eager.

“Sure! Let me just take out my contacts, and then I’ll join you guys,” he replied.

“Great! We’ll get things set up!” Eunwoo said, already heading for the kitchen.

Jungkook nodded and headed to his bedroom to remove his blue contact lenses.

After taking the contacts out he walked back to the dining area with a smile. “Okay, all done! Let’s eat! I’m hungry!” He says as he sits down.

“Ooo, you guys brought jjangjangmen! Ooo and some fried chicken. Weird combo but I’m not complaining!” He says excitedly as he looks at the two dishes undecided with what he should start first.

He eyes both but ultimately decides to take the jjangjangmen bowl first. He removes the plastic wrap before breaking his chopsticks into two.

He mixes the sauce together and begins to eat.

As he took his first bite, savoring the rich flavor, he glanced up at his friends. “So, before you guys bomber me with questions about today and yesterday, how have you been?” He took a sip from his beer can, letting the carbonation settle as he listened.

“It’s been good!” Eunwoo started, setting his drink down. “Except, remember how I said I probably wouldn’t be doing anything for my acting minor until senior year since it’s mostly basics?”

Jungkook and Mingyu both nodded. Eunwoo was majoring in art but had a minor in acting, something he had taken up more for fun than anything else.

“Well… I was wrong,” Eunwoo sighed, running a hand through his hair. “My professors apparently liked my development in acting, and now they’ve cast me as one of the lead roles in the next theater showcase.”

Jungkook and Mingyu exchanged wide-eyed looks before turning back to him.

“Eunwoo! That’s amazing! Congratulations!” Jungkook grinned.

Mingyu clapped him on the back. “Seriously, that’s huge! Didn’t you want this?”

“I do,” Eunwoo admitted, a small smile tugging at his lips. “But I’m nervous as hell. These showcases sometimes bring in talent scouts—people looking for the next acting star. I’m not afraid of not getting recruited, but the thought of messing up in front of them? That terrifies me.”

Jungkook nodded in understanding. “That’s a lot of pressure.”

“Yeah,” Eunwoo exhaled. “And it’s not just the performance. If they do take notice of me, I don’t know how I’ll handle the attention. Good or bad.”

Mingyu leaned back in his chair, crossing his arms. “I get it. Once people start paying attention, it’s hard to go unnoticed again. But you’ve worked hard for this. If anything, you deserve that spotlight.”

Jungkook remained quiet momentarily, Eunwoo’s words hitting closer to home than he expected. He understood fear better than anyone—the weight of eyes watching, the anxiety of being seen. It was the very reason he had created Ian in the first place.

“You’ll do great,” Jungkook said, offering a small smile. “And when the time comes, you’ll figure out how to handle the attention, just like you figured out how to get here.”

Eunwoo chuckled. “I hope you’re right.”

Mingyu then smirked, leaning forward slightly. “Alright, but enough about us. How was the session with the guys? They must be thrilled with how everything’s coming together.”

“Did anybody get suspicious?” Eunwoo furrowed one of his eyes as he asked.

“No, or at least I don’t think so. I hope not,” jungkook laid back on the chair.

“Everything is doing good so far. It was our first session but we finished recording a full song! The song is amazing and very of theme with the upcoming party,” his eye lit up and a huge smile was formed on his face as he was explaining.

“The second song… now that one is going to be a killer. It’s even better than the first, though we haven’t recorded it yet,” he added just as Mingyu suddenly sat up.

“Wait, wait, wait—you guys recorded an original song? And you’re recording another one? Not covers, but two completely new songs?” Mingyu asked, eyes wide in disbelief.

Jungkook nodded as he took another bite of his noodles, chewing and swallowing before continuing.

“Yeah. They wanted to stand out, so they wrote their own songs for the party. Yoongi, Namjoon, and Hobi hyung all worked on them. Honestly, they’re really good. The production, the lyrics—it all feels professional.” He grabbed a napkin and wiped his mouth before adding, “I knew about it beforehand because when I was tutoring them, they briefly mentioned Ian and how they had songs ready. They were hoping he’d be okay with the extra work.”

“I take it the session went well?” Eunwoo asked, leaning forward with interest.

Jungkook nodded. “Yeah, it did. Though… somehow, I ended up with more lines than I expected? Hobi has the most since he sings the chorus, but after him, it’s me. I never thought they’d like my voice that much, but apparently, they do…”

“I can though!” Eunwoo chimed out of the blue.

“Me too. Your voice is amazing and fits with anything! I hope one day you really see how talented you are. You should start realizing it by now with all the good reactions you get performing as Ian,” Mingyu added.

“I am starting to see it. I felt it during the last performance. It’s just…” Jungkook hesitated, searching for the right words.

“It means more coming from them. It surprises me because they’re practically professionals. They’re not just popular for their looks, but because they’re incredibly skilled. Professors praise them all the time.”

“I don’t think I’m at their level yet. They’d probably say otherwise, but… I just hope that with time, I can be.”

Mingyu and eunwoo looked at each other. They weren’t going to say more but they hoped one day Jungkook would see that he’s already at the other guys level. He just needed to be the one to realize it.

After that conversation they continued eating and enjoying the rest of their night as they talked about the session and everything else.

The following days though passed in a blur of tutoring sessions and brief conversations between classes. Jungkook found himself growing more accustomed to the group despite it being only a week since they started the tutoring. Their personalities, once a distant presence, now felt familiar, welcoming.

He caught himself laughing more, speaking up more, and—against his better judgment—feeling comfortable. The worry of what others might think began to fade slowly, replaced by something far more daunting—how much he wanted to belong.

But as the week went on, all conversations seemed to lead back to one thing: Ian’s upcoming performance. Which Jungkook had been working hard on despite having classes and tutoring sessions.

He was glad the others delayed the scheduling of the recording of fake love and the session of the first dance practice to next Monday. It gave him some time to plan things out and feel less pressured.

They had just wrapped up an early tutoring session at Jimin’s place when the topic came up again.

“Man, it’s been too long since Ian performed,” Hoseok said, stretching as he leaned back on the couch. “I’m excited to see what he does this time.”

Jungkook forced a small smile, nodding. “Yeah… should be interesting.”

“Do you know anything about this performance?” Jin asked, tilting his head slightly. He figured Jungkook might have overheard something from the club employees while working his occasional shifts there.

Jungkook kept his expression neutral. “Sort of? I overheard some workers saying it’ll have a different vibe this time. Less mysterious, maybe?”

Jimin perked up. “Ooo, now I’m even more curious!”

“But it’s probably best to be surprised,” Jin added, smirking.

Hoseok suddenly turned to Jungkook. “Hey, want to come to the club with us again, Gguk?”

“Yeah! Why not?” Taehyung added, leaning in. “After tutoring us all week, you deserve a break.”

Jungkook hesitated. He remembered the chaos of the last time he tried juggling both identities. If he went again, how was he going to pull it off without raising suspicion?

This time, it’s completely up to you. No pressure,” Jin reassured. “But according to the schedule you showed me before, you’re free tonight, right?”

Jungkook internally panicked. He could technically go, but he needed a solid plan. If he arrived late again, that might seem suspicious. Maybe if he went with them first, then slipped away…?

After a brief moment of hesitation, he sighed and forced a tight smile. “Sure, why not. I don’t have anything urgent… so I guess I’ll go.”

“Great! We’ll come pick you up since you’ve been our chauffeur lately,” Yoongi said, sipping his water.

“Sounds good. What time are we heading there?” He asked.

“Uhm hold up—“ Namjoon replies checking his phone to see the poster of when Ian’s performance would be.

“He performs at 8:30 so why not get there at like 7? Almost more than an hour! So, I guess we could pick you up at 6:50? Is that okay with you?” Namjoon put down his phone and looked up to the other who was thinking again.

The timing was both a little restricting but manageable. He could ask either of his three 97 liners to take his clothes once more. He could be with them until 7:50 and then head out to get ready as Ian in 30 minutes which he guessed he may be able to pull.

“Yeah, that works for me!” He nods.

“Great! I can’t wait for another fun night! We had a blast in the last one!” Namjoon lays back smiling as he thinks back on their last outing at the club.

“Me too!” Jungkook says. Taking out his phone and texting his group chat

97 boys

Jungkook: Can anybody help me out once more with the whole wardrobe situation for my performance tonight?

Jungkook: Guess who was invited to go to the club again? This time though, I have to head at the same time with them, so I need someone to come drop my clothes off at the dressing room!

Eunwoo: oh jungkookie… I feel this secret is going to frustrate you a lot as time passes by. It’s been a week, and you already have to rearrange your things.

Jungkook: I know…but I can do it I swear! It won’t be forever either. I told you guys it wouldn’t.

Mingyu: We will drop it off! We can use some drinks again. Though eunwoo is right but I guess you know what you are doing.

Jungkook: thank you! You guys are life savers. I will only have 30 minutes to get ready though and makeup takes me a bit still. Can your makeup cousin help me again mingyu?

Mingyu: sure, don’t worry! She’d love to! But yeah we will take care of stuff.

Jungkook: okay thanks!

Jungkook put the phone down, feeling a little relieved. He could keep this up. He won’t let one week stress him yet.

After staying at Jimins for a little Jungkook went back to his apartment to practice his performance for two hours and then showered and relaxed for a couple of hours before getting ready.

He was currently thinking whether he should take his glasses or not. He opts not to take them, seeing as it would not fit his fit.

He wore black jeans, sneakers, a shirt and a black jacket.

He then walked into his living room to check the time on his wall clock.

It was already 6:48, so the hyungs would arrive To pick him up at any minute now.

He went ahead to go get his stuff. Luckily, mingyu and Eunwoo had stopped by 30 minutes ago to get his wardrobe for his performance.

Suddenly, he heard a ding. He looked at his phone and saw Jin's notification.

Jin hyung: hey gguk! We are here now!

Jungkook: okay, I’ll head down now!

He texts back, puts his phone in his back pocket, and leaves his apartment.

He goes down the elevator, and as he comes out of the lobby door, he immediately finds a car parked in front. The windows show everyone inside.

They quickly smile when they see him and point for him to get in the front. He nods and goes in to open the door for them.

“Jungkookie! Looking good!” Hoseok is the first to compliment him once the other got inside the car.

“And look! He didn’t take his glasses this way!” Yoongi, who was in the driver's seat, pointed it out.

The younger blushes slightly.

“Thanks! I decided I should keep them away for events like this! You all look good as well!” He compliments them back as he turns to look at each as best as he can.

“Thank you Jungkookie! Anyway, let’s get going and get our party on! Can’t wait for us to see Ian again together!” Jin sits back, smiling as Yoongi pulls off to start driving.

Jungkook grins, feeling nervous. “Yup, me either,” he says as less anxious as he can. He hopes he can pull this off…

The ride to the club was filled with laughter and energy, music playing through the speakers as the city lights blurred past the windows. Jungkook sat in the front seat, nodding, but his mind was racing.

As they arrived, parked the car and headed inside, they all moved to the same table they sat on the last time they had come to the club. As Jungkook walked to their spot he noticed that once again the crowd was bigger like last time.

He hadn’t performed in a week or so but seems like each time it’s just increased in size and he feels it’s both astonishing and kind of intimidating.

Once they sat down, they all ordered some drinks. Jungkook started out with just a beer as he didn’t want to drink much before going up on stage. It was also important to note that he sat on the edge of the booth so that he would be able to slip away more quickly.

“This place is very packed today…” he said out loud, catching the attention of the others who looked around to take notice on the fact.

Jimin nods. “It is, it’s very packed actually…but I guess that’s just the crowd that he pulls in! After hearing him in the studio the other day, it’s no wonder,” he said.

Jungkook smiles slightly at the compliment.

“We know we are being annoying by saying it. And we did see how good he was last performance, but this time…to see how it’s like to hear in studio just shows more sides,” Namjoon elaborates.

“Well, that’s good to hear!” Jungkook responds by taking a sip of his beer. He then starts checking the time on his Apple Watch. It took them only 15 minutes to get to the club and so far it’s been five minutes since they arrived.

He had another 10 minutes before having to slip off and get ready. The nerves slowly increased as he realized that it was getting closer. He hoped he was as discreet.

As time passed and they chatted, he checked.

Ten minutes.

He clenched his jaw, heart beginning to race.

Now or never.

He needed an excuse.

He glanced down at his phone again, pretending to read a message. Then, putting on his best casual face, he sighed and stood up.

“Ah, guys,” he started keeping his tone light.

“I need to go make a quick phone call, I’ll be back and won’t take long!”

Jin, who had just sipped his drink, narrowed his eyes slightly. “Right now?”

Jungkook nodded quickly.

“Yeah, my dad is texting me on something, so I think it’s better to call so that it doesn’t keep bothering,” he explains, hoping the other would buy that excuse.

“Everything okay?” Hoseok now asked, and he nodded.

“Yeah, just a work thing! I’ll be back!”

“Uh-huh,” Taehyung muttered, his gaze lingering a little longer than necessary. “Funny how you always disappear right before Ian performs.” He then slightly pouts.

Jungkook swallowed hard but laughed. “Total coincidence, I swear!”

Hoseok, oblivious to the exchange, waved him off. “Well, just don’t take too long, yes?” He says and the other nods.

Giving a two-finger salute before leaving as if he was taking the exit route, but really, he was pacing to the back of the stage and into the dressing rooms.

He looked around to make sure nobody was following him or that anybody wasn’t looking.

Mingyu, with his cousin, rushes him in as he gets in. “Hey noona! I’ll go get dressed quickly!” He greets and gets his bag as he takes off his shoes and clothes that he is currently wearing.

He puts on his dark jeans and his blue silk shirt. Mingyu helps button it and attach the scarf part.

He then sits in the makeup chair and quickly wears black sneakers. He then sits up, and Lets’s Mingyu’s cousin, Chung-hee, put his classic blue eye contact on.

Once he was done, Chung-hee got started with his makeup, which didn’t need much, while Mingyu helped style his hair. Thanks to his cousin, Mingyu had some experience in styling hair.

As he gets his stuff done, he hears his phone buzz, which makes him nervous as he knows it’s the others wondering where he is. It has been 10 minutes since he left. He decides to ignore it, though.

“I’ll mute this for you for now, as I know this week keeps making you nervous,” Mingyu speaks as he puts Jungkook's phone in silent mode.

After a few more minutes, he was done.

“All done Jungkookie!” Chunghee says and smiles, handing him the top half mask this time.

He smiled, thanking her.

For a moment, he stared at his reflection in the rearview mirror. Jungkook was gone.

All that remained was the confident, untouchable persona of Golden Ian.

With one last glance at the clock, he got up to leave the dressing room and head to the stage again.

“You will rock it!” Mingyu says as he walks behind him.

“That’s what I hope,” he smiles.

About twenty minutes had passed, and Jungkook still hadn’t returned.

“Okay, now it’s kinda weird,” Jin muttered, setting his drink down. “Even if his phone’s dead, why would he disappear like this?”

“Yeah, it’s been too long for a quick call,” Namjoon admitted, glancing at the entrance.

Jimin rechecked his messages, he had been the one to text him. He pressed his lips together. “Still no read receipts.”

“Should we go look for him?” Jin asked.

Yoongi shook his head. “Let’s not overreact. He knows where we are.”

Then, Taehyung spoke up casually.

“Didn’t this happen last time?”

Jin turned to him. “Huh?”

“I mean,” Taehyung shrugged, playing it off, “last time we came here, Jungkook was late and missed Ian’s performance completely. Now we’re all here together, and suddenly he disappears again?”

Yoongi raised a brow. “You think there’s a pattern?”

Taehyung scoffed lightly. “Nah, it’s probably nothing. Just bad timing.”

The words left his lips easily, but in the back of his mind, it didn’t feel like nothing.

Before they could discuss it further, the club lights dimmed, and the MC’s voice rang out.

“Alright, everyone, you’ve been waiting for it! Give it up for our very own Golden Ian!”

The crowd erupted into cheers, excitement crackling through the air.

The group’s conversation halted instantly.

“Ian’s up,” Jimin said, tucking his phone away. “Guess we’ll ask Jungkook later.”

Jin sighed, shaking his head. “That kid has the worst luck.”

Hoseok chuckled. “Or the worst timing.”

Taehyung, however, didn’t reply.

Instead, he turned toward the stage, watching Ian enter the spotlight.

For now, he didn’t say anything.

For now, he just observed.

The club buzzed with anticipation as the MC stepped forward, hyping up the crowd.

“Alright, everyone, the moment you’ve been waiting for! Give it up for Golden Ian!”

Cheers erupted, voices mixing with the thumping bass of the club’s speakers. Excitement filled the air, but six guys sat up a little straighter at one particular table, their eyes fixed on the stage.

Taehyung leaned forward slightly, gaze locked on the dimly lit platform. Jungkook was nowhere in sight, but he hardly noticed as the first notes of the performance began.

A low hum filled the speakers, the instrumental of Chains creeping in like a slow-burning fire.

Then—

“With her wine-stained lips, yeah, she’s nothing but trouble…”

Ian’s voice cut through the air, smooth and restrained, dripping with sultry emotion.

He stood still at first, letting the song’s intensity build. The lights shifted—soft golds and deep shadows flickering against his frame. His posture was controlled and poised as if he was keeping something caged inside.

Then, with the first beat drop, he moved—a slow roll of his shoulders, his fingers grazing his chest before sweeping outward in fluid, controlled gestures.

The audience was hooked, mesmerized by the way he commanded attention without even trying.

Ian stepped closer to the front of the stage as the song built toward the chorus, his voice dropping lower.

“Tryna break the chains, but the chains only break me…”

His body language mirrored the song’s meaning—as if he was trapped in invisible restraints, rolling his wrists in sharp yet smooth motions before dragging his hand through his hair.

He then put his mic on the stand.

Alone in the night till she knocks on my door

Wasted again, but I can’t say no , no

Baby tell me why, why you do, do me wrong

Baby tell me why, why you do, do me wrong

Gave you my heart but you took my soul

He brought his hand to his chest and repeated the same restraint moves.

You got me in chains (oh babe), you got me in chains for your love

But, I wouldn't change (I wouldn't change), no I wouldn't change this love

You got me in chains, you got me in chains for your love

But, I wouldn't change (wouldn't change), no I wouldn't change this love

Tryna break the chains but the chains only break me

(Hey, hey, hey)

The song faded into an eerie silence.

For a split second, everything stopped.

Then….

Strong lights flashed, cutting through the darkness.

The moment the first guitar riff of Animals hit, Ian snapped into motion, a stark contrast from his slow, hypnotic start.

He owned the stage now.

His movements were sharp, untamed, his footwork quick yet deliberate as he prowled across the space, completely in sync with the pulsing rhythm.

“Baby, I’m preying on you tonight,”

His voice was strong, confident, laced with a teasing edge.

This wasn’t the restrained mystery of Chains. This was raw power, an explosion of controlled chaos. His spins were sharp, foot stomps echoing through the floor, his body rolling effortlessly into each transition.

The club ate it up, cheers erupting as he moved dangerously close to the edge of the stage, looking out at the audience like a predator surveying his territory.

Jimin nudged Jin. “He’s insane.”

Jin just stared, feeling that same nagging familiarity tugging at him.

The final chorus hit hard, the beat slamming into silence as Ian tilted his head back, breathing heavily from the intensity.

For a second, the stage dimmed, the tension heavy in the air.

The explosive drums kicked in instantly, shaking the air with their power. The crowd erupted, caught in the sheer force of the final act.

Ian moved like fire, spinning into the opening beat almost recklessly. His steps hit hard, every movement packed with intention.

“You want me, you need me… but I’m just a dead man walking tonight…”

His voice cut through the noise, raw and filled with a passion none had heard before.

The lighting was chaotic now, flashing between deep reds and neon blues, creating wild, electrifying energy.

And then—the moment of impact.

As the final chorus crashed, Ian threw his entire body into the last sequence, a perfect fusion of power and precision.

And then—

Silence.

The stage lights cut to black.

The club roared with applause.

But when the lights flickered back on—

Ian was gone.

Everyone clapped loudly as usual after the end of his performance. They knew he was gone but they also knew that the male was hearing their cheers and applauses.

The six sat stunned, still processing what they had just seen.

Jimin exhaled, shaking his head. "That was unreal."

Namjoon scoffed but kept applauding. “ Just disappears every time, huh?”

Jin ran a hand through his hair, looking at the empty stage. That sense of Deja vu was stronger than ever, but he still couldn’t place it.

“We need to talk to him next time” Hoseok muttered.

“Yeah,” Jin agreed. “Next time, we won’t let him leave so fast.”

Taehyung didn’t say a word.

His gaze lingered on the space where Ian had been standing.

Something wasn’t adding up.

Chapter Text

“I think we should go congratulate him again like we did last time! If possible we could also try to confirm if we are good for the first dance practice as well!” Jimin looked at the others to see if they were on board. 

Hoseok grinned. “I agree, it’s only fair we congratulate him in person for another amazing performance.”

“Then let’s go ahead! Though maybe we should check one more time for Jungkook or text him again!” Namjoon added. 

“You guys get ahead! I’ll take a quick peak right now!” Jimin volunteered. The others nodded leaving the booth and heading to the dressing room.

Jimin glanced toward the crowd, as if hoping to spot Jungkook returning from wherever he had disappeared to. But when he saw no sign of him, he shook his head.

“Hope you are okay Jungkookie,” he said, and went ahead to catch up.

On the other hand, Jungkook had reached his dressing room in record time. He immediately began wiping off his sweat with papers and putting his face near the fan as he started to take off his shoes and pants and messily throw it in the bag. 

He took off the silky shirt and began putting his clothes on again. He was scared that the others may come and talk to him again and that if not, that the others would get worried or annoyed that he kept taking so long. 

“Hey! Great job as always! But let me help you!” Mingyu came inside the door. 

“Thanks for helping me out again,” the brown haired boy says as he ties his shoes and starts ruffling his hair and style it to the way he had beforehand. 

“Well, it’s what I’m here for though after tonight I’m starting to think this will truly turn out to be tiresome for you,” Mingyu organizes his clothes better and handed him his jacket. 

“I know, but it’s what I decided to do so now I have to suck it up! Let me take my contacts off,” he replies as he begins take each colored contact one by one and putting it back in the solution case. 

In all it took him about 8 minutes to do everything. Once he was good to go Mingyu grabbed his things and left. Jungkook thanked him. 

As he was heading out of the dressing room he panics when he hears the voices of the hyungs near by. He quickly looks around and finds a small shortcut through one of the other rooms. 

“Let’s knock first!” Jin points out once they had arrived to the dressing room. 

Jin knocks once. 

No response 

He then knocks a second time 

“Hey Ian! It’s us!” Jin says again. 

As they tried waiting a little Jungkook had been able to walk back from the way the olders had taken. He straightens up before slightly speaking. 

“Hyungs?” He softly says in a question like tone. 

The others turn back, surprised and relieved to finally see him again. 

“Jungkook! Finally you appeared!” Yoongi comments as they walk near him. 

“Sorry! My parents wanted me to do something on my phone for the company and got back tracked. I didn’t mean to worry you guys, again,” he spoke apologetic. 

“Also if you are looking for Ian, I was just told that he had to leave because he had something going on. So, you won’t find him there,” he adds. 

Hyungs?” His voice was soft, feigning innocence as if he had only just arrived.

The others turned around, their expressions a mix of relief and exasperation.

“Jungkook! Finally, you appeared!” Yoongi huffed, shaking his head.

“Sorry! My parents needed me to handle something for the company on my phone, and I got caught up. I didn’t mean to worry you guys… again,” Jungkook said, adding an apologetic chuckle.

“Well, at least you’re back now,” Jin sighed.

“Oh, and if you were looking for Ian, I just heard from one of the staff that he already left. Something came up, so he had to head out early,” Jungkook added quickly.

The disappointment was evident on their faces.

“Damn, we just missed him,” Hoseok muttered.

“Guess we’ll have to talk to him at practice,” Jimin sighed. “Oh well—at least the performance was insane.”

“Were you able to see anything at all about his performance Jungkook?” Taehyung turned and asked the male who wondered what to say. 

“Well I saw the last few minutes of Youngblood before disappearing. I then went out to search for you guys and when I didn’t see you in the spot we were I turned to see you guys going somewhere so I followed,” Jungkook explains neutrally, acting as if that was truly what he did. 

“Oh” taehyung said frowning. 

“It’s weird and coincidental how every time we want you to see Ian together with us it just doesn’t work out! Also you are always looking for us. We really have to nail it down some day,” Jimin comments frowning but shaking his head.

Jungkook chuckles and touches the back of his neck worried. 

“Guess I haven’t been lucky. Though I did see most of his performance the last time,” he says so that the others didn’t think that he hadn’t seen it at all. 

“That’s true. Well like Jiminie said. One day it will succeed!” Taehyung adds in putting an arm around Jungkook who nodded. 

“Yeah haha. Let’s hope,” he says feeling those nerves again. 

“Anyways, we will catch up with Ian next practice. Everyone want to continue drinking and dance like the last time or do we want to do something different this time?” Namjoon asks the group. 

“Ooh!” Hobi reacts. 

“ How about karaoke? We haven’t done that in a while and we always have fun! We could eat too if we go to the place that we like and that has good food,” He  suggests looking at the others for their opinion. 

Namjoon perked up at the idea. “That actually sounds great. I could use some stress relief.â€

Yoongi smirked. “You just want an excuse to scream into a mic, don’t you?”

“Maybe.”

The group laughed, and Taehyung grinned. “Jungkookie, you in?”

In an instant that he heard karaoke Jungkook felt himself panicking. He thought the others would have some other idea on what to do, karaoke wasn’t one of them. 

Karaoke meant singing—something he was actively trying to avoid in front of them as himself.

He could deny and say he wants to go home but I’ve already slipped from them once. He didn’t want to do it again. He also didn’t want raise any suspicions.

Feeling defeated from the inside and scrambling to think of how he would take action towards the activity he ended up saying yes. 

“Sure, why not! It would be fun!”  He responded with a tight smile.

“Great! Let’s go! It’s good that we didn’t park so far in the lot,” Hoseok commented as one of the members got their key out. 

“What am I going to do?”

Jungkook thought. 

The karaoke lounge they went to was dimly lit, with cozy booths and a giant screen flashing colorful visuals as lyrics scrolled by. The group settled in, immediately arguing over which songs to sing first.

Jin and Jimin were the most enthusiastic, flipping through the songbook while Yoongi leaned back, saying he’d only participate when absolutely necessary.

“Alright, first song—something fun,” Hoseok said, scrolling through the selections. “Let’s start with something everyone can get into.”

“Let’s do BIGBANG’s ‘Bang Bang Bang’ first,” Jin suggested excitedly, and the room immediately erupted in agreement.

As the music blasted through the speakers, the group hyped each other up, dancing and singing loudly into the microphones. Jungkook found himself loosening up despite his earlier nervousness, enjoying the energy of the moment.

One song turned into another, with the group taking turns picking their favorites.

Then, after Jimin finished a powerful ballad, he turned to Jungkook with a smirk. “Alright, Jungkookie, your turn!”

Jungkook tensed but played it off with a casual chuckle. “Ah… I don’t know. I haven’t done karaoke in a while.”

“Come on, don’t be shy!” Taehyung nudged him. “You’ve gotta sing at least once.”

“Yeah! It’s only fair,” Hoseok chimed in.

Jungkook swallowed. He had to be careful. If he sang too well, it might raise suspicions, especially after they had just heard Ian perform. But if he sang badly, it would be out of character for him, considering they already assumed he had some vocal ability.

Thinking quickly, he pulled a safe excuse. “Alright, fine. But don’t expect much—I haven’t sung in a long time.”

He scrolled through the song list, choosing something simple—“boyfriend” by Justin Bieber. He liked his music and this song in particular didn’t have much vocal dynamics to it. 

The first part was more talk tone vocals which he could somehow trick his voice to doing. Everything else was in a lower tone so it wouldn’t sound much like Ian. All he had to do was try to make some of it be off key. 

As the music started, he intentionally sang a little off-key, slightly breathy, as if he were nervous. 

Jin tilted his head hearing the other sing. He remembered Jungkooks vocals being more better a year or two ago. It was weird to him that it was off key and a little strained. 

As he looked around the room to see the hyungs reactions he could see some of them making encouraging expressions instead. While the others smiled but were clearly a bit surprised by his vocals. He assumed they expected something more. 

It didn’t offend him though. He was doing all this on purpose. He knows he can actually sing well. 

Though in that moment he slightly realizes he just complimented himself. Something he doesn’t do normally but it somehow felt right to do so. He thought it wasn’t a lie. 

Jin furrowed his brows, exchanging a glance with Jimin. “Huh… Jungkook, your voice sounds… different.”

Jungkook let out a sheepish laugh. “Yeah, I told you—I haven’t sung in forever. This is why I didn’t want to join your performance group either.”

The others nodded in understanding, though Jin still looked slightly puzzled.

“Well, you’re still decent, even if you’re rusty,” Jimin said, patting Jungkook’s shoulder. “Maybe we should do karaoke more often and warm you up again.”

Jungkook forced a chuckle. “Maybe.”

Namjoon got up patting his back, “Don’t be discouraged gguk! You at least sing more on key than us three. Are you good at rapping? We haven’t tried something of that sort!” 

It was true. He hadn’t rapped anything as Ian yet. He planned to do it at some point to try but he didn’t think he was a good rapper so. Though with rap even if it was bad his vocals wouldn’t shine through much. 

“You want me to try rapping?” He asked as the others nodded. 

“Yes! Actually why don’t we rap a song of ours! The good thing of this karaoke place is you can connect your phone with the plug to play through the speakers any song you want! Have you heard when we did ddaeng once in school?” Yoongi asked as he went to his phone to connect it. 

“I did. I love that song,”Jungkook happily answers remembering listening that he listened to it on repeat when Jin had given him the file for the song after he knew Jungkook enjoyed it. 

“Yeah! He was why I asked for the file!” Jin comments, remembering at the same time. 

“Let’s do that then!” Namjoon smiles. 

“Wait! You three are good at singing,” Hoseok points at Jin, Jimin, and Taehyung who look up curious to how the other would continue. 

“We are so so how about to make it fair? You guys aren’t as good in rapping. Why don’t we all try singing ddaeng? We we do it evenly!” Hoseok throws the idea out. 

“I like it! I’ve always wanted to rap you guys songs!” Taehyung stands up putting some glasses as a way to get ready. He did like the rap songs Namjoon yoongi and hobi would compose. 

“Me too! Why not! It be fun!” Jin nods standing up. 

“Me too!” Jimin smiles. 

“Okay then we will signal when one of you guys go! Jimin you start us off after the intro chorus!” Yoongi smiles as he starts the song and they all get ready.

Jungkook smiles hoping he doesn’t disappoint much. 

As the music started, Namjoon took the lead, his deep voice setting the tone for the intro.

“One-eight, one-three, three-eight, ddaeng

You wrong, me right, look carefully, ddaeng

Ring the school bell, brr brr, ddaeng

Hey, your life’s over, you’re ddaeng”

The moment the beat dropped, everyone started moving to the rhythm, small dance moves coming naturally as they hyped each other up. As Namjoon finished, he pointed at Jimin to take over.

“Hip-hop? Ddaeng

Rap style? Ddaeng

Just a rapper, ddaeng

Bangtan = Ddaeng

But reality, bang

Worldwide, bang”

Jimin started off a little hesitantly, but with the others cheering him on, he quickly found his groove, his voice gaining confidence. He shot Jin a look before pointing at him, signaling him to go next.

Jin blinked, then pointed to himself. “Me?”

Jimin nodded eagerly, and Jin took a deep breath before diving in.

“Above the charts, bang bang, ddaeng

Got money, woo

AP, woo

Nice house, woo

Someone’s dream life, woo

How ’bout you, uh”

Jin rapped with determination, exaggerating his expressions, which had everyone grinning. The energy in the room was contagious. He sent the mic to Hoseok next, and the moment Hoseok opened his mouth, he owned his part, delivering each line flawlessly.

“I like you, uh

I made success, uh

All thanks to you, uh

Isn’t it funny, isn’t it funny, ye

Don’t you feel dumbfounded, ye

To be honest, I think calm”

He barely took a breath before jumping into the next lines effortlessly.

“About why they, ye

Make such a fuss, ye

There’s enough time, ye

This is homework, homework, ye

If you can’t solve this, then your problem is, ddaeng”

As he finished, Yoongi jumped up. “Alright, let’s all hit the chorus together!”

Everyone shouted in agreement, grabbing their mics, and when the chorus hit, they went all in—voices overlapping, laughter mixed in between.

“Ddaeng

Mm… From my perspective, you are, ddaeng (Ddaeng)

We all, ddaeng

No matter who’s strong

I, ddaeng, don’t care at all

Hunnit bae, hunnit bae, hunnit bae, hunnit bae, ddaeng

This music is shit, bae

Though you might be jealous, bae

All your claims are true, bae

Thanks to you, Billboard, bae”

Yoongi then jumped into his verse, delivering each line with his signature laid-back style.

“Cause we’re failing (Hahaha) Thanks

Thank you, thank you, thank you

Thank you for ignoring us until now

Thank you, stadium, dome, Billboard

Thanks to you, we became successful

You small friendly companies

I hope you all become big soon

We’ll fail again like you wish

So please keep worrying

Kkeut”

As they hit the chorus again, Jungkook was fully lost in the moment, bopping his head, moving his body along to the beat.

Namjoon suddenly turned to him, pointing at himself and then at Jungkook.

“Together?” Namjoon asked with a smirk.

Jungkook hesitated, but Jimin immediately cheered, “Let’s get it, JK! Come on!”

The encouragement pushed Jungkook to step forward. Singing off-key was one thing… but rapping? That wasn’t something he ever practiced.

Namjoon kicked it off first:

“The cash register sound, ddaeng”

He gestured toward Jungkook, and without overthinking it, Jungkook took his turn.

“When I was young, I liked to play freeze tag, ddaeng”

As he rapped, the others’ eyes widened slightly—not in a bad way, but in surprise.

Jungkook continued:

“I’m ding-dong, you’re ddaeng”

Namjoon followed up, flowing smoothly.

“You’re seven-kkeut, I’m ddaeng”

Jungkook kept going, his confidence growing.

“Your face after eating ramen, ddaeng”

Namjoon gave him a nod of approval, stepping back and letting Jungkook finish the entire verse on his own.

Jungkook exhaled but dove into the next lines effortlessly.

“Dregs do your thang

Look at me, I’m your errthang

You dope? You cool? You’re not cool

This is just ridiculous

Even if I st-st-stutter my words

I h-hope you understand

I la-la-lack a way with words

Bu-but I try to speak correctly but my mouth keeps ge-ge-getting crooked

Because I li-li-li-like it I li-like it very much”

The room erupted.

“DAMN, Jungkook! Who knew you could rap?” Hoseok shouted, clapping.

“Who are you to recognize me

You frogs who live up to your name

I hope you die in that well

I’ll pray earnestly, ddaeng”

Jungkook was panting slightly, the adrenaline rushing through him, but he felt a spark of pride.

Woo! Let’s keep going!” Taehyung cheered, jumping in to dance along with Jungkook’s rap as they launched into the final part of the song.

By the end of the song, everyone was breathless, laughing, and hyped.

They all exchanged looks, grinning widely as they took in what just happened.

Yoongi raised an eyebrow, impressed. “Where the hell did you learn to flow like that?”

“They’re right! That was incredible!” Jimin added enthusiastically.

Jungkook, still catching his breath, rubbed the back of his neck sheepishly. “Honestly… I don’t know. I just followed the beat and went along with it.”

“It didn’t sound like ‘just going along with it,’ though!” Jin pointed out. “That was solid.”

Namjoon nodded approvingly. “Maybe you’re meant to be a rapper, Jungkook.”

“Well, damn,” Namjoon laughed. “This karaoke session just exposed Jungkook.”

“Right?” Jimin smirked. “I think we just discovered something big tonight.”

Jungkook flushed, waving his hands. “It was one time! Don’t expect anything more!”

But judging from the looks they were giving him, they weren’t going to let this go anytime soon.

The energy in the room was still buzzing, the excitement from Jungkook’s unexpected rap performance lingering in the air. The others were still exchanging glances, processing what had just happened.

Jungkook, still slightly breathless, wiped his palms against his jeans, trying to shake off the attention. “Seriously, I don’t know how that happened,” he admitted, voice tinged with disbelief. “I wasn’t even thinking. I just… did it.”

Namjoon grinned, arms crossed as he leaned against the couch. “That’s what makes it even crazier. You didn’t just rap—you flowed. You had cadence, you hit the beat like it was natural.”

Yoongi, ever the producer, tilted his head. “You ever try rapping before?”

Jungkook hesitated before shaking his head. “No, never. I mean, I’ve listened to rap a lot, but I never thought about actually doing it.”

Hoseok threw an arm over Jungkook’s shoulder, squeezing him with a laugh. “You’ve got a hidden talent, my friend. First, you were shy about singing, and now this? What else have you been keeping from us, huh?”

Jungkook chuckled awkwardly, his mind racing. If only they knew.

Taehyung smirked, throwing an arm around Jin. “Maybe he’s secretly a dancing prodigy too.”

Jungkook nearly choked on air, but he quickly covered it with a laugh. “Yeah, right.”

Jin, still thoughtful, glanced at him. “You really never practiced rapping before? Because that was way too smooth.”

Jungkook shrugged. “I swear I haven’t. Maybe it’s just because I’ve listened to so many rap songs? I don’t know, it just sort of… happened.”

“What a good way to end a fun night out!” Taehyung sat down taking a piece of cut meat from the play into his mouth.

They could keep doing songs but they were all now feeling tired. Jungkook especially was feeling a little fatigued even if he didn’t show it. The whole stunt he pulled at the club and hyping himself up at the karaoke club had him feeling slightly exhausted. 

Hoseok grinned. “Yeah, I think this was better than any club night. We gotta do this more often,”

The group laughed as they started gathering their things, the night's adrenaline still lingering but settling into a comfortable, easygoing warmth.

Jimin stretched before slipping his phone into his pocket. “So, what now? Are we calling it a night?”

Namjoon checked the time. “Well its late, so probably best to head home.”

Yoongi yawned, running a hand through his hair. “Yeah, I need sleep. This was fun, but I swear my ears still ring from Taehyung’s screaming earlier.

Taehyung gasped. “Excuse me?! That was my award-winning hype energy. You should be grateful.”

“Whatever helps you sleep at night,” Yoongi deadpanned.

The bickering continued as they went outside, laughter and light teasing filling the space. Jungkook walked a little behind them, letting himself soak in the moment” the rare feeling of belonging that he had been denying himself for so long.

But as he watched them, a familiar voice in the back of his mind whispered:

How much longer can you keep this up?

Jungkook shook off the thought, focusing on the now. He wasn’t going to worry about that yet.

For tonight, he just wanted to exist with them in this space, in this warmth.

Even if it was built on a carefully crafted lie.

After having a fun weekend and one of those days as a much needed rest, Monday had finally come, which meant it was the first day of practice for blood, sweat, and tears. Over the week Hoseok and Jimin had recieved the demo of the choreography created for them and only tweaked a coupe of things for the choreographer to fix. 

Now it was all ready for them to start learning. For it being the first practice, everyone in the room, though still feeling a little groggy, were at the same time curious as to how the dance came to be and ready to start putting things together. 

Jungkook entered the studio right on time, where the others were already stretching and chatting. “Hello everyone,” he greeted, bowing and slightly adjusting his mask. The group turned to him with smiles, all greeting him in unison with cheerful "heys" and "hi's."

“Ian! Incredible performance as always! You absolutely rocked it Saturday night!” Hoseok beamed while watching the guy unpack his things in a corner. 

“You truly know how to own the stage,” Namjoon remarked. “Your movements and the strong presence you bring make a lasting impression on everyone.” 

“Absolutely! You manage to surprise us every time,” Yoongi chimed in while stretching his leg.  

Jungkook chuckled, feeling warmth rush to his cheeks. “You all give me so many compliments. It feels like you think I'm an idol, but that’s not the case at all. Still, thank you!” He said, moving on to start his warm-up.  

“You're pretty close to being an idol!” Taehyung smiled.  

“Yet, it’s like you have teleportation abilities. One moment you’re on stage finishing strong, and the next—poof—you’re gone like the wind,” Jin remarked, stretching his arms overhead. 

“Yeah, we’ve been wanting to talk to you for a while and praise your outstanding performance, but we couldn’t locate you. Where did you go?” Yoongo, now stretching his arms, continued speaking.

“Sorry about that! I had some personal issues to handle, so I packed my things and left. It wasn’t anything serious, just something I couldn’t postpone,” he explained in a neutral tone, feeling a bit relieved. It matched what he had previously told them as himself.

“We understand. Guess we’ll see you next time!” Hobi shrugged.

“Well, you’ve found me now!” he teased lightly.

They engaged in a bit more small talk until everyone felt warmed up enough. 

Hoseok clapped his hands together. “Alright! Now that we’re warmed up, let's start by watching the choreography video. This way, if you didn’t manage to review it over the weekend, we can begin with the intro and chorus, and then we'll focus on positions before trying to put everything together,” he explained.

“Also, this dance—like the song—doesn’t have a sexy vibe, but you need to exude a smooth and subtly proactive energy in certain sections," Jimin interjected as they all nodded, understanding what to do.

“Let’s check it out!" Namjoon exclaimed as they gathered to view the choreography sent to them. They had watched the video several times before deciding to learn it the way Hoseok had proposed designed.

As expected, they were making good progress with the choreography. While some sections needed additional focus and a few repetitions to master, it was all manageable.  

Jungkook stayed focused, ensuring he blended in naturally instead of standing out. He moved through the formations fluidly, staying in sync with the group.

Midway through, Namjoon stumbled slightly, missing a crucial step in the footwork, causing his movement to look stiff.

“Wait—was it the left foot first?” Namjoon asked, frowning as he tried to correct himself.

Without thinking, Jungkook stepped forward instinctively. “No, it’s the right foot first,” he corrected smoothly. “If you step with your left, you lose balance before the transition.”

Namjoon blinked in surprise. “Oh? Let me try that again.”

Jungkook nodded as Namjoon followed his advice. This time, his transition was noticeably smoother.

“Ooh, that is so much better,” Namjoon admitted. “Thank you, Ian” 

“No problem!” Jungkook replied. 

Watching the exchange, Taehyung noticed that Ian's guidance to Namjoon resembled Jungkook's tutoring style. It felt much less awkward this time compared to before 

It wasn’t just a guess—it was certainty.

Taehyung said nothing, but the thought settled like an itch he couldn’t quite reach.

He wasn’t sure what it meant yet, but one thing was becoming evident—Ian was more familiar with them than he let on.

After 30 more minutes they decided to take a good long break. It had been four hours since they had started learning non-stop, with only a five-minute break set here and then before beginning business again. 

When Hoseok said they should take a more extended break, most groaned in relief with some rolling on the floor panting and others grabbing their water bottles. 

“This is so intense. We’ve had intense choreo before, but this one is starting to be more intense than any other as of now because we still have no clue how Fake Love will go,” Jin exhaled, then proceeded to drink half his water bottle in one go. 

“I agree! Though seems like we are getting somewhere! We at least have learned the whole about 80 percent of the choreo and have about 55 percent down almost well enough,” Taehyung added in. 

"I'm impressed with how quickly Ian picked it up," Namjoon noted, nodding toward Jungkook. "You're really good at making the moves look effortless."

Jungkook waved a hand dismissively. "I just follow what you guys do. You’re all strong dancers, making it easier for me."

"You’re being too humble," Hoseok chuckled, stretching out his legs. "Your movements are clean, and your body control is insane. I can see why people go crazy for your performances at the club."

Jungkook rubbed the back of his neck, feeling a mix of pride and mild panic. He needed to balance Ian’s confidence without drawing too much attention to his actual skill.

"I'm just used to performing," he said with a slight shrug. "You guys have experience with group choreography—I'm just adjusting to that part."

After some chitchat and getting their breath, the boys returned to business and continued practicing for four more hours. They all cooled down with slow stretches once they had called it a day. 

“Okay, I think that was a solid first practice! We keep this up and we may have the choreo down this week, and can start recording fake love, and then have choreo for that, and then in two weeks, we’d rehearse both songs well until the party,” Jimin speaks, stretching. 

“Can’t believe it's four weeks away! Can’t wait,” Jin smiled. 

“Its going to be fun,” Yoongi nodded. 

Namjoon winced slightly as he stretched his legs but continued, “You know, we’re actually managing everything pretty well—school, tutoring, and putting this performance together.”

“That’s true,” Taehyung agreed, lifting his head slightly. “And speaking of tutoring, Gguk has really made everything easier. Usually, tutoring is boring, but he actually makes it fun.”

At the mention of his name, Jungkook stilled for a fraction of a second, his ears more alert even as he kept stretching.

“Yeah, he’s good at it,” Jimin nodded. “It’s honestly made teaching you guys a lot easier.”

Jungkook remained quiet, simply observing as they talked about him. It was always a little strange, hearing them discuss him so openly while he was standing right there—just under a different name.

“You know,” Jin said, stretching his arms over his head. “I think we’ve actually done a good job of getting Jungkook to open up a little. I mean, he’s still quiet, but he’s not running away from us anymore.”

“I agree,” Jimin nodded. “He seems more comfortable now compared to when we first started tutoring. Like, he talks more, laughs more… We had a great time with him on Saturday, too.”

“You know,” Jimin continued, a sudden thought crossing his mind. “We should invite him one day to watch our practice.”

Jungkook’s stomach dropped.

“That’s a great idea!” Hoseok grinned. “It might be fun for him to see everything come together.”

Jin nodded. “Yeah, I think he’d appreciate it.”

Jungkook felt his throat go dry.

If they invited him to practice, what the hell was he supposed to do?

Would they expect him to watch himself dance? What excuse could he possibly give not to go?

He forced himself to keep his voice steady. “You think he’d want to?”

“I don’t see why not,” Namjoon shrugged. “He’s been tutoring us, so he’s already involved. Plus, it’s not like we’re asking him to perform—he’d just be watching.”

“Maybe we can ask him once we have both choreographies down and surprise him by letting him be the first to see our full performance!” Jin suggested, excitement lacing his tone.

Jungkook subtly exhaled a quiet sigh of relief.

They wouldn’t ask him right now, which meant he had more time to come up with a solid excuse—or better yet, hope they’d get too busy and forget to ask altogether.

Just as he was mentally filing that away, Taehyung suddenly spoke up.

“Speaking of Jungkook,” his voice was casual, too casual for Jungkook’s liking.

Jungkook stilled for half a second before forcing himself to stay relaxed.

“Ian,” Taehyung continued, eyes watching him closely, “Jungkook mentioned that he’s caught glimpses of you practicing a few times whenever he’s called in to fill for someone. Do you guys ever talk? Or is he just as shy at work, too?”

Jungkook’s mind scrambled for the most natural response.

“Oh, I don’t run into him all the time,” he answered smoothly, keeping his tone light and casual. “But we’ve greeted each other and chatted here and there. It’s pretty rare, though.”

Jin perked up. “Oh? So, he does talk to people at work?”

Jungkook nodded. “Yeah, but mostly with the club owner and a few other employees. He’s still pretty reserved, though—keeps to himself most of the time.”

“Figures,” Jimin chuckled. “Even when we’re with him, he still has those moments where he just zones out.”

The group shared a light laugh, letting the conversation flow naturally.

“Anyway, I think we should get going. I want to shower, hit my bed, and relax,” Yoongi groaned as he stood up, grabbing his bag.

“I think we all want the same thing,” Hoseok agreed, stretching his sore muscles before reaching for his belongings.

“So, still up for Wednesday, Ian?” Yoongi turned back to Jungkook as they all started gathering their things. “With the recording of Fake Love scheduled for the weekend?”

Jungkook nodded immediately, keeping his voice even. “Yup! Sounds good to me.”

“Great. Well, let’s get out of here. I just wanna go home and sleep,” Jin yawned, lazily making a two-finger salute before strolling out of the practice room.

The rest chuckled, following suit, each one leaving one by one—except for Taehyung.

He had forgotten something in the far corner of the room.

As he walked over to grab it, he saw something else.

Ian’s water bottle.

He picked it up without thinking much of it, ready to call out after him—until his gaze landed on three small but unmistakable initials.

“JJK.”

Taehyung’s brows furrowed. His grip on the bottle tightened slightly as confusion seeped in.

"JJK? Why does he have that written on it? Is that his Korean name?"

He tilted the bottle, inspecting it further. The lettering was neatly written, as if it had been there for a while—not something hastily scribbled on.

He felt something stir inside him, something he couldn’t quite grasp.

But before he could dwell on it for too long, he heard footsteps approaching the door.

Jungkook—or Ian, as he was known to them—walked back inside with a slight frown.

“Ah, I forgot my—” His words cut short when he saw Taehyung holding the bottle.

For a moment, neither of them said anything.

Then, Taehyung smiled, the same carefree expression he always wore, and casually tossed the bottle back to Ian.

“Here,” he said easily. “You forgot this.”

Jungkook caught it without hesitation, nodding. “Ah, thanks.”

Taehyung gave a small shrug as he slung his bag over his shoulder. “No problem. See you Wednesday, Ian.”

With that, he turned and walked out.

Jungkook didn’t think much of it—his mind was more focused on how sore his legs were and how much he needed a shower.

Taehyung stepped out of the practice building, rolling his shoulders with a deep sigh. The ache from hours of dancing settled into his limbs, a familiar exhaustion that he welcomed. But tonight, something else lingered—something that had nothing to do with the long training session or the weight of choreography.

Ian.

Or rather, everything about Ian that didn’t quite add up.

Taehyung twirled his car keys between his fingers, his mind replaying the small but nagging details from the past few weeks.

The water bottle.

JJK.

It could have been a coincidence. Maybe Ian’s real name had those initials. Maybe it belonged to someone else. Maybe he was overthinking.

But the thing about Taehyung was that he trusted his instincts.

And his instincts told him something wasn't right.

It wasn’t just the initials—it was the way Ian carried himself.

Despite being a “new” presence in their lives, Ian didn’t interact with them like a newcomer. His familiarity with them, with their habits, their strengths, and even their dynamic—it felt too natural like someone who had been watching them, not just performing with them.

And then there was his reaction when they mentioned Jungkook.

He had answered too smoothly, too easily. Not stiffly, not awkwardly, but in a way that almost felt... practiced.

And yet, Jungkook had told them he only spoke to Ian in passing when he filled in at the club.

Something wasn’t lining up.

Taehyung sat in his car but didn’t start the engine, instead resting his hands on the steering wheel, deep in thought.

It wasn’t like he suspected something crazy. But... something felt off.

His mind wandered back to Jungkook.

The younger had always been shy and introverted, but recently, there was a shift. He had been opening up, spending more time with them, yet at the same time, there was a wall. Like he was letting them closer, but only up to a point.

And then there were the moments where Jungkook tensed at certain topics—Ian being one of them.

Taehyung exhaled sharply, running a hand through his hair.

He had no proof. No real reason to assume anything.

But the feeling in his gut told him that something wasn’t adding up.

For now, he’d keep his suspicions to himself.

He wasn’t looking for answers—not yet.

"I’ll expect the sheets to be sent by the end of this week. That concludes today’s lesson—have a good day, everyone.” Jungkook’s entertainment management professor wrapped up the class with a final nod before dismissing them.

Jungkook exhaled, stretching his arms as he began packing up his things.

“Well, at least he didn’t ramble like last time,” Eunwoo muttered, stuffing his notebook into his bag.

Jungkook chuckled. “Right? It’s a miracle when he actually keeps it short.”

The two exited the classroom together, the buzz of students filling the halls as they made their way outside.

“Anyway, enough about that. Tell me—how was your first dance practice with the hyungs as Golden Ian?” Eunwoo asked as they headed toward a shaded bench.

Jungkook plopped down with a sigh, rolling his shoulders. “It was good… but I won’t lie, I’m a little sore.”

Eunwoo raised a brow. “Really?”

“Mhm.” Jungkook stretched his arms behind his head. “I mean, I should be used to it by now, considering the performances I do as Ian. But this dance? It’s on a different level. It’s intense. There’s a part where I’m literally grinding on the floor—”

“Wait, grinding on the floor?” Eunwoo cut in, looking mildly amused.

Jungkook laughed. “Yeah, it’s the vibe of the song. It’s dark, but it’s also… not sexual, exactly, but it has this sensual intensity while still being expressive.”

“Damn, now I really can’t wait to see it.”

Jungkook shook his head, a grin playing on his lips.

“What about the second song? Have you guys started recording it yet?” Eunwoo asked, shifting the conversation.

“Not yet. That’s scheduled for this weekend.” Jungkook exhaled. “I’m kinda nervous about it, though. The first song was already intense with high notes and a demanding choreo, but this one? It’s packed with high notes. Jin-hyung and Jimin-hyung are handling most of them, but even my ad-libs are tough.” He rubbed the back of his neck. “And if the dance is anything like what I think it’ll be… it’s gonna be brutal. Less sensual, more emotionally expressive.”

Eunwoo nudged him lightly. “You’ll do fine. If anything, this is just making you level up in both singing and dancing.”

Jungkook smiled slightly at the encouragement but sighed. “I hope so.”

A brief silence settled between them before Eunwoo tilted his head. “You say they don’t suspect anything, but… are you sure? No one’s given you any signs?”

Jungkook hesitated for a second, picking at the hem of his sleeve. “I mean, I assume they don’t… but I can’t be completely sure. Taehyung-hyung, though—sometimes he asks things that feel like tests. Like he’s fishing for something. But if he really knew, I think he’d be upfront about it.”

Eunwoo hummed in thought. “So, he’s not acting too suspicious yet?”

Jungkook shook his head. “Not too much. But…” He sighed. “One thing does have me worried. They mentioned wanting me to come watch their performances with them after both choreos are down. Like, watch it together as a group. And obviously, that’s not possible.”

Eunwoo winced. “Damn. Yeah, that’s… not gonna work.”

“Exactly,” Jungkook muttered. “So I’m just hoping they forget about it.”

Eunwoo gave him a knowing look. “You better hope so. But honestly, Gguk—this is only going to get harder the longer you keep it up.”

Jungkook sighed, already knowing where this was going.

“I get why you haven’t told Jin. I do. But at this rate, you need someone from that side who knows the truth. It’ll make things way easier for you.”

Jungkook didn’t respond right away, simply staring at the pavement beneath his feet.

Eunwoo sighed. “Just… think about it, okay?”

Jungkook nodded absentmindedly, though deep down, he knew Eunwoo was right.

He just wasn’t sure if he was ready for that yet. 

“Now I have to go to class in five minutes and you have a two hour gap before your last class, will you be going with the hyungs today?” 

“I think so. I’m feeling a little bad that it’s them who always ask of my presence and I think I should start putting my part too. So I’ll go look for them,” Jungkook says. 

“Hmm good call! Anyways I’ll start heading out but I’ll text you later!” Eunwoo pats jungkooks shoulder and leaves. 

Jungkook sighs. 

Jungkook adjusted his bag strap and made his way toward the campus café, knowing that if the hyungs weren’t already inside, they’d be close by. It didn’t take long to spot them—Jin, Yoongi, Namjoon, Jimin, Hoseok, and Taehyung were gathered around a table by the window, deep in conversation.

As he approached, Jin was the first to notice him. “Jungkookie! Look who finally decided to join us voluntarily.”

Jungkook let out a small laugh as he slid into the empty seat beside Jimin. “What can I say? I figured I should stop making you guys do all the work in inviting me.”

“You should,” Yoongi deadpanned, though there was a smirk tugging at his lips.

Jimin nudged Jungkook’s shoulder playfully. “Glad you’re here. We were just talking about how our bodies are still sore from practice.”

Jungkook chuckled, feigning sympathy. “I get it. That choreography isn’t easy.”

Hoseok groaned dramatically. “Easy? It’s a killer. But at least we have today to breathe before jumping back into it.”

As the conversation naturally flowed between topics—school, upcoming assignments, and their plans for the rest of the day—Taehyung quietly observed Jungkook. He wasn’t actively looking for something to pick apart, but ever since spotting those initials on Ian’s water bottle, his mind had been working overtime. The similarities he had been brushing off before were now harder to ignore.

Jungkook, on the other hand, remained blissfully unaware of Taehyung’s careful glances, fully immersed in the moment.

“So,” Namjoon started, sipping his drink. “We were thinking of doing something after class tomorrow since we don’t have practice. Maybe dinner or just hanging out. You in, Jungkook?”

Jungkook hesitated for a split second. He’d been spending more time with them outside of tutoring lately, and though it was nice, it also made keeping his secret trickier. But he couldn’t exactly say no without raising suspicion.

“Yeah, sure,” he agreed easily, taking a sip of his drink.

“Good!” Jin clapped his hands together. “We can finally have a night without someone mysteriously disappearing.”

Jungkook almost choked on his drink. Was that directed at him?

“Not my fault you guys always pick times I’m busy,” he quickly said, keeping his tone light.

Jimin laughed. “Excuses, excuses.”

Taehyung, however, didn’t join in. Instead, he tapped his fingers against his cup, replaying everything in his head. He wasn’t going to say anything—not yet—but something inside him told him he was getting closer to an answer.

And he wasn’t sure how Jungkook would feel about that.

Saturday

Jungkook arrived at the studio earlier than the others, needing extra time to warm up. ‘Fake Love’ was an entirely different beast compared to ‘Blood Sweat & Tears.’ It was heavier, more raw, requiring him to push his vocal limits while keeping the emotion intact.

As he sat by the piano, softly humming the melody, he could already tell—this session wasn’t going to be easy.

“Oh hi Ian!” Namjoon greeted as the first one who walked in and the others followed one by one right after him greeting him as well.

“Did we make you wait?” Jimin asked. Jungkook shook his head. 

“Hello, and no it’s fine. You guys are fine, I just came to practice a little before we started seeing as how this song is..” he tilts his head, “more vocally expressive.” 

“It is! Jimin and I were talking about that,” Jin replied. 

“As well as the time,” he sighed 

“Why do we always schedule these things early?” Jin groaned, stretching as he set down his bag.

“It’s noon, Jin,” Jimin deadpanned.

“Exactly.”

Yoongi chuckled as he adjusted his notes. Sitting on one of the chairs. “Alright, let’s not waste time. ‘Fake Love’ is no joke, and we need to make sure it sounds polished before we even think about choreography.”

Namjoon clapped his hands together. “Let’s do a full run-through first, just to feel it out, then we’ll break it down.”

Which is exactly what they did. They ran over it together in acapella two times but not putting much of their vocals in it as to not strain it early or tire their vocals early. Then they started the process which was different. 

Unlike last time, where the recording process had been smooth with minor tweaks, this session was a battle from the start.

The vocal line, despite their experience, struggled under the weight of the song’s demands.

Jin and Jimin, responsible for the higher notes, had to redo their sections multiple times—their voices cracking on certain sustained notes as they fought to keep their vocal control steady.

Jungkook, though used to challenging songs, found himself tripping over one of his own verses.

Yoongi, seated at the control board, exhaled and leaned into the mic. “Ian, let’s go again. You’re aiming too high too fast—ease into the note instead of pushing for it.”

Jungkook sighed, rubbing the back of his neck. He wasn’t used to struggling this much in a recording session. He could feel the weight of everyone’s attention on him, and it only made him more determined to get it right.

He inhaled deeply as the track played again, allowing himself to feel the song rather than overthink it. This time, he softened his approach, letting his voice glide into the note rather than forcing it.

The difference was immediate.

Jimin, who had been watching him closely, gave him an encouraging thumbs-up from across the room.

The rap line, in contrast, had a much easier time.

Yoongi, Namjoon, and Hoseok delivered their parts smoothly, adjusting only minor details. Namjoon slightly reworked his pacing, while Hoseok experimented with how much intensity he wanted in his lines.

But even then, the energy in the room was different from when they recorded ‘Blood Sweat & Tears.’

That session had felt new, exciting—a rush of creativity.

This one?

It felt like work.

Not in a bad way—but in an intense, exhausting, leave-everything-you-have kind of way.

They were in the studio for hours, going over each section again and again until it was just right.

By the time they reached the final chorus, everyone was drained.

Jin wiped the sweat from his forehead, exhaling in relief. “We better nail this because I don’t think my throat can handle too many more takes.”

Namjoon chuckled, stretching his arms. “You and me both.”

Yoongi leaned back, adjusting the volume. “That last take was solid. Let’s go over it again and tweak anything that needs fixing.”

Jungkook exhaled slowly, rolling his shoulders. This had been one of the toughest recording sessions he’d ever had—but he had pushed through it.

Another way it was different form blood sweat and tears is that for BST they finished recording in a day but for fake love they had to use two days as it extended to Sunday. And in Sunday too it took a while. However, by midday they had been able to wrap everything up. 

They were now just waiting for yoongi and hobi to finish the final mix before hearing everything. 

-

-

Once Yoongi finished balancing out the final mix, the group slumped onto the couches, relieved but satisfied.

“Okay, let’s go ahead and listen, shall we?” Hoseok asked. 

“Let’s do it!” Taehyung said sitting up. 

The somber, eerie intro filled the room deep, haunting synths layered over a muted, almost melancholic guitar riff.

It felt desperate, hollow, like the weight of heartbreak sinking in.

For you, I could pretend like I was happy when I was sad

For you, I could pretend like I was strong when I was hurt

Taehyung deep baritone voice started the song. Then switched to Jungkooks deep honey voice continuing the first verse 

I wish love was perfect as love itself

I wish all my weaknesses could be hidden

I grew a flower that can’t be bloomed in a dream that can’t come true

Their voices blended like a quiet plea, fragile yet filled with unspoken pain.

Then—Jimin.

His voice pierced through the mix, filled with frustration and despair.

“I’m so sick of this fake love, fake love, fake love…”

Jin’s deeper vocals grounded the hook, adding another layer of intensity.

“I’m so sorry but it’s fake love, fake love, fake love…”

The beat dropped.

The room vibrated as the bass and drums kicked in, the instrumental swelling into something dark and powerful.

They kept listening to the song all attentively 

As the song began its descent toward the climax, Jimin’s voice softened, breaking into a near whisper.

“Woo, I dunno, I dunno, I dunno why…

Woo, even I, even I don’t know myself…”

Jin followed, his voice aching, full of realization.

“Woo, I just know, I just know, I just know why…

’Cause it’s all fake love, fake love, fake love…”

Their voices bled into the final chorus—more strained, more desperate.

Jungkook’s falsetto soared, cutting through the heavy instrumentals, carrying so much pain it felt tangible.

The final echoing notes faded into nothingness.

The room was silent.

“WOW that even better,” hobi sais, feeling speechless. 

Namjoon leaned forward, elbows on his knees. "Perfect! The emotions-- the way it builds up. It's exactly what we wanted.

Hoseok grinned, though there was still a glint of disbelief in his eyes. 'Damn. We actually pulled this off."

Yoongi leaned back, nodding in approval. “It’s  ready.”

Jungkook, still staring at the speakers, finally exhaled.

He had been so nervous about this recording. The notes, the delivery, it had tested him in ways he hadn’t expected.

But hearing it now, he felt relieved.

This was his voice, woven into something that mattered.

The group sat in silence for a few more moments, letting the weight of the song settle in.

Then—Jimin groaned, dramatically rubbing his throat.

“That was hell,” he complained. “I feel like my vocal cords need a three-day vacation.”

Hoseok chuckled, stretching his arms. “Well, it sounds amazing, so I’d say it was worth the pain.”

Yoongi leaned forward, resting his elbows on his knees. “Now that we’ve wrapped up the second song, I can finally say—I’m actually getting really excited for this party. It’s going to be something special.”

Jin nodded. “Yeah, this is shaping up to be bigger than we expected.”

Hoseok sighed, shaking his head. “The only thing standing in our way now is the choreography. And I just know it’s going to be worse than Blood Sweat & Tears. We might actually need the choreographer to step in sooner to help us out.”

Namjoon let out a dramatic whine, spinning his chair around. “Gosh, more sore days ahead. I can already feel it.”

The others laughed at his misery, the tension from earlier lifting slightly.

Jungkook chuckled along with them, but deep inside, he was already bracing himself for what came next. If Fake Love had been this exhausting to record, what would the choreography demand from them?

And more importantly—how much longer could he keep up this double life?

Chapter Text

“Oh, look at you being the first one here!” A smiling and teasing Jin said to Jungkook after opening the door and stepping to the side to let him in.

“I told you I’d get to your place earlier than the rest for this tutoring session, Hyung,” Jungkook replied as he took off his shoes and walked into Jin’s big apartment. It wasn’t super big, but it was bigger than his.

“I’m just messing with you!” Jin ruffles his hair and walks to the table where they would all do their tutoring session today.

Unlike their usual study sessions at the university library or a reserved classroom, Jin had suggested hosting today’s tutoring session at his apartment. Their classes had been canceled for the day, and a change of scenery sounded like a good idea.

Jungkook went to the dining table where they’d be studying, setting his bag down on one of the chairs. He pulled out his tablet and sketchbook, then rolled in the small whiteboard that had been tucked into the corner of Jin’s living room.

It felt more casual here, quieter, a little more like home. But he had to stay focused.

Within a few minutes, he had everything set up and ready to go. Now, he just had to wait for the others.

Jin leaned against the kitchen counter, watching Jungkook neatly arrange his things. “You really are dedicated, huh?”

He then proceeded to pour some homemade juice into a glass and give it to Jk. He left the pitcher on the kitchen island, all set and ready for when the others came and felt thirsty.

Jungkook glanced up, quirking a brow. “Shouldn’t I be? You guys always come unprepared.”

He took the glass with juice and drank some of it before putting it down.

“Hey,” Jin held a hand to his chest, feigning offense. “I come semi-prepared.”

Jungkook snorted. “You showed up with an empty notebook last time.”

Jin shrugged, walking over to ruffle his hair again, just to be annoying. “That’s still semi-prepared. I had the notebook, didn’t I?”

Jungkook swatted his hand away with an exasperated laugh. “Whatever helps you sleep at night, hyung.”

Jin chuckled, finally pulling out a chair and sitting down.

So, my little one,” Jin began, his voice dripping with amusement. One of his many playful nicknames for Jungkook.

Jungkook rolled his eyes but didn’t bother protesting—it was a battle he’d long since given up on.

Jin, clearly enjoying himself, folded his arms and leaned back against the chair. “What will you be helping us with this session? And be honest—do you think we’ve actually made any progress over the past month?”

Jungkook let out a small laugh as he logged into his tablet. "Today’s focus is on lighting and visual composition. Since you guys are performers, you’ll probably already know some of it. But it never hurts to strengthen your understanding.”

He glanced up, meeting Jin’s expectant gaze.

Jin was still waiting for an answer.

With a small smirk, Jungkook reached for his glass of juice, taking a slow sip.

“I think I’ll save my full evaluation for when everyone else is here,” he said lightly. “But… let’s just say it’s somewhere between not bad and not good.”

Jin’s brows shot up. “What do you mean ‘not bad but not good?!’” he demanded, his tone a mix of confusion and playful annoyance.

Jungkook chuckled, setting his glass down. “Just wait until the others get here, yeah?”

Jin huffed, clearly displeased with the suspense. “You enjoy keeping me in the dark, don’t you?”

Jungkook simply smiled, his silence answer enough.

As if on cue, the sound of Jin’s doorbell rang, signaling the arrival of the rest of the group.

“I’ll get it!” Jin called out, already heading toward the door.

Jungkook finished his drink just as a familiar wave of voices echoed through the apartment. Yoongi was the first to step into the dining area, and his usual laid-back energy filled the room.

“Sup, kiddo,” Yoongi greeted, eyeing Jungkook’s neatly set-up materials. “Already prepared as always, huh?”

Jungkook grinned. “I never miss, hyung.”

Before Yoongi could respond, a burst of energy followed. Hoseok and Jimin walked in together with bright smiles and warm greetings.

“Good afternoon, our Ggukie!” Hoseok chimed, plopping into a seat.

“There’s our tutor and helper!” Jimin grinned, giving Jungkook a firm pat on the back. His gaze landed on the notebook filled with their notes. “Is this the sacred notebook of wisdom?” he joked, flipping through the pages.

Jungkook chuckled and nodded. “Mhm.” Then, turning toward Hoseok, he greeted back, “Afternoon, Hobi-hyung.”

A sudden cheerful voice rang through next.

“Jaykay! My bro!” Taehyung strode in dramatically, throwing an easy side hug around Jungkook’s shoulders before plopping beside him.

“Hi, Gguk!” Namjoon, the last to arrive, offered a casual wave as he entered.

Jungkook kept his usual warm smile. “Sup, hyungs.”

Once everyone had settled in, Jin clapped his hands together. “Alright, that’s all of you! Before we start, I wanted to let you all know that I made some homemade juice, so help yourselves.” He gestured toward the kitchen before sitting near Jungkook, Jimin, and Taehyung.

Namjoon, already pulling out his tablet and stylus, looked up expectantly. “So, what’s today’s lesson, Jungkook?”

Jungkook turned to the group, his voice smooth but focused. “Today, we’re reviewing visual composition and lighting for drawing and photography. You’re all performers, so you should get the concepts easily—assuming you haven’t already.”

Taehyung smirked, flipping through the study materials. “Yeah, I think we might have a regular-timed session this time.”

A not-so-subtle dig at how long some others took to grasp specific topics.

“Hey!” Jin immediately defended himself, frowning. “Jungkook explains things well, but you and Jimin lose patience with us!”

Jimin scoffed playfully, crossing his arms. “That’s because we know what you guys are capable of!”

Jungkook, watching the lighthearted bickering unfold, chuckled to himself. This dynamic never failed to entertain him.

“Alright,” he interjected, stepping aside slightly. “So that no one feels stressed by the end of this, I’ll let Jimin and Taehyung-hyung start you guys off.”

With that, he gestured for them to take over, watching as the session officially began.

At Jungkook’s cue, Jimin and Taehyung stepped forward, taking their places at the front with playful confidence.

“Alright, class,” Jimin grinned, flipping open the notebook with an exaggerated sense of authority. “Since your dear tutor Jungkook has decided to be merciful today, Taehyung and I will be starting your lesson.”

Taehyung smirked, arms crossed. “Don’t get too comfortable, though. If any of you slack off, we’ll return you to Jungkook.”

“Hey, I heard that,” Jungkook muttered under his breath, amused.

The group chuckled and settled into their seats as Jimin and Taehyung discussed the first topic: visual composition in photography and performance.

Jungkook, now off to the side, leaned against the table, watching them with quiet interest.

It was always fascinating, seeing the others teach.

Jimin was direct and engaging. His explanations were fluid and animated, and his energy effortlessly drawn people in. He had a way of breaking things down that made concepts feel natural, like he was telling a story rather than giving a lecture.

Taehyung, on the other hand, was more relaxed, but his insight came through in small but sharp observations. He wasn’t one to over-explain, but when he spoke, his words had weight—delivered with the ease of someone who understood the subject well, even if he pretended not to care too much.

Jungkook watched as Jimin gestured toward a reference image on his tablet.

“See this shot? The reason it’s visually striking is because of the rule of thirds. Instead of putting the subject in the center, it’s aligned to one side. That creates a more balanced and dynamic composition,” Jimin explained, his tone effortlessly confident.

The others nodded along, some jotting notes, others simply listening.

Taehyung, leaning casually on the table, added, “Same thing applies on stage. If all of us were dead center the whole time, the performance would look flat. The contrast between movement and stillness makes it visually interesting.”

Jungkook found himself smiling slightly, watching as the two kept the group engaged.

They were good at this.

Better than they probably realized.

For a moment, he simply observed, taking in the easy back-and-forth and the way their teaching styles balanced each other.

Maybe it was because he was usually leading these sessions, but watching from the outside like this made him appreciate it even more.

They all had their own strengths.

And this—learning from each other and pushing each other to improve—was what made them a team.

He knew they sometimes saw these tutoring sessions as a necessary evil, something to get through.

But to Jungkook, it meant something more.

Because if things had been different, if life had gone another way, this could have been his world too.

Studying. Performing. Teaching alongside them—not as Ian, but as Jungkook.

His fingers unconsciously tapped against the edge of his tablet.

For now, though, he had to keep playing his role.

“Alright,” Jimin clapped his hands together, pulling Jungkook from his thoughts. “I think that’s enough theory. Time for some examples—Jungkook, you got the visuals ready?”

Jungkook blinked, pushing aside his lingering thoughts.

“Yeah,” he nodded, shifting back into focus. “Let’s go through them one by one.”

And just like that, the lesson continued—but the weight in Jungkook’s chest didn’t fade.

Jungkook straightened, tapping on his tablet to pull up the first set of visual examples. The others leaned in as the images flashed onto the screen—various shots demonstrating the impact of composition and lighting in photography and stage performance.

“Alright,” he began, his tone smooth and focused. “Let’s start with something simple—leading lines.”

He swiped to an image of a dancer mid-motion, their figure framed perfectly between the converging lines of the stage’s backdrop.

“This is an example of using the natural lines in the environment to guide the viewer’s eyes to the subject. The moment is impactful because of the way the lines all point toward the dancer—even if you weren’t paying attention, your eyes would naturally follow them.”

Namjoon nodded, a flicker of understanding crossing his face. “So it’s kind of like how we arrange ourselves in formations, right? When we transition in a performance, we don’t just move randomly—we create movement that guides focus.”

Jungkook grinned slightly. “Exactly.”

Jin leaned forward, tapping his chin. “Huh, I guess I never thought of it that way before. Makes sense why certain shots in music videos look better than others.”

Jungkook moved to the next image—a stage illuminated by contrasting warm and cool lights, the performer standing at the center, bathed in a single spotlight.

“This one is about contrast in lighting. The warmth of the foreground against the cooler background creates depth, making the subject stand out. It’s the same reason why, during emotional performances, they sometimes dim the backlights or use colored lighting to set the mood.”

Hoseok’s eyes brightened with recognition. “Ah! Like when they drop the background dancers into the shadows so the focus stays on the main performer?”

Jungkook nodded. “Yup. Your brain processes all these elements even when you don’t realize it. The lighting, the framing—it’s all done deliberately to enhance the impact of a moment.”

He swiped through a few more examples, explaining each with ease, his confidence growing as he saw the hyungs understanding the concepts more quickly this time.

They were getting it.

And that was always his favorite part of teaching—when things just clicked.

Even Jin, who often struggled with visual concepts, was nodding along, following the explanations more smoothly.

Jimin, always the perfectionist, jotted down a few notes. “I wish we had gone over this earlier. It would’ve helped me a lot with analyzing past performances.”

Jungkook chuckled. “Well, now you know.”

Finally, he reached the last example.

He pulled up an image of a stage performance mid-action—a wide shot where the performers were carefully positioned to create a visually striking moment.

“The composition, the lighting, the spacing between the performers—it’s all deliberate. But there’s also something else at play here. The way they positioned their bodies—see how none of them are perfectly still? That’s what makes the image feel alive.”

Taehyung’s breath hitched.

That phrasing. That explanation.

It was too specific. Too familiar.

That was something Ian had told them before.

And it wasn’t just what Jungkook said—it was how he said it.

That same casual confidence. That same fluid, effortless way of speaking.

The way Ian spoke.

Taehyung’s stomach tightened.

For a moment, he glanced around at the others. No one else seemed to notice.

Namjoon was nodding, engaged in the explanation.

Jin looked surprisingly focused for once.

Hoseok and Jimin were still scribbling down notes.None of them were picking up on it.But Taehyung?

He saw it. He heard it.

And now, he couldn’t unsee it.

Jungkook had said things only a performer would know.

And this wasn’t the first time.

First, the way he spoke about stage lighting earlier, and then his natural knowledge of how visuals and formations worked.

And now, this?

It was all too much to be a coincidence. But he still had no proof.

Just a gut feeling—one that was growing stronger by the second. Taehyung forced himself to stay neutral, masking his expression.

Not yet.

“Alright, try telling me what you would do with these two pictures, and we can wrap up the session for today," Jungkook said, placing his laptop in the middle of the table.

The screen displayed two unedited photos side by side, waiting for their analysis.

For a moment, the room fell into thoughtful silence.

It only took them ten minutes to carefully examine the images, each taking turns commenting on what they would adjust or enhance.

“Good. That’s actually what we would have done as well,” Jimin said approvingly after listening to their responses.

Jungkook nodded in agreement, exchanging a glance with Taehyung, who also looked satisfied.

“Alright then,” Jin clapped his hands together, stretching his arms behind his head. “Safe to say we’re done for today!”

Jungkook shot him an unimpressed look as Jin casually shut his tablet, clearly ready to move on.

“By the way, Gguk,” Namjoon spoke up before Jungkook could protest, “how do you think we’re progressing with this subject? Are we actually improving?”

Jungkook leaned back slightly, tilting his head. “You guys should answer that question yourselves. Do you feel like you’ve improved?”

Yoongi was the first to nod. “I’d say so. I don’t feel like shutting my laptop in frustration whenever I see a new assignment for this class, so that’s progress.”

“And my grades have definitely improved,” Hoseok added, looking satisfied.

Namjoon folded his arms, resting them on the table. “Yeah, I’ve noticed the difference, too. I don’t get as stressed anymore, which is nice.”

Jungkook smiled. “Well, then there’s your answer.”

Jin, however, was far from satisfied.

“But I want to hear it from you!” he whined, throwing his hands up. “Just tell us already! Or at least one of you three—give us an official rating or something!”

Taehyung chuckled, shaking his head. “You guys have improved a lot, hyung. We can tell.”

Jimin nodded. “It’s true.”

Jungkook reaffirmed, “You’ve all made a lot of progress.”

Jin squinted, then frowned. “Then why did you tell me earlier—before they got here—that it was neither bad nor good?!” he complained, throwing an exasperated look at Jungkook.

Jungkook smirked, barely hiding his amusement.

“I was just messing with you.”

Jin let out an exaggerated groan as the others burst into laughter.

“Anyways, moving on! Now that we are wrapped, Ggukie—” Jimin started putting an arm around the boy's shoulders. “We have some news to share with you!”

Jungkook tilted his head in amusement. “Really? What about?” He looked at Jimin.

“We have officially finished recording fake love and wanted to have you be the first to hear it!” Namjoon spoke with a smile.

“Wait really?” Jungkook pretended naturally in a surprise tone.

“Yup! We also want your opinion the song!” Jimin added.

“Well then show me I guess,” he smiled as he figured ways in his mind to show or make it seem as if he barely heard the song first time.

Jin grabbed his phone, quickly connecting it to the speakers, his fingers moving swiftly across the screen before pressing play.

The familiar opening notes of Fake Love filled the apartment, and instantly, the atmosphere shifted.

The group naturally fell into a familiar rhythm—heads nodding, fingers tapping against the table, their bodies unconsciously syncing to the beat.

Jungkook, meanwhile, kept his expression neutral, open—like someone experiencing the song for the first time.

He made a point of tilting his head slightly, furrowing his brows at key moments, acting as if he were analyzing it. He let his fingers tap against his thigh in a slow, seemingly thoughtful motion, mimicking a casual listener picking up the song’s rhythm for the first time.

From the outside, it was convincing.

Too convincing.

The others were far too absorbed in their own listening experience to notice anything odd.

Namjoon closed his eyes briefly, probably dissecting the lyric flow.

Hoseok tapped his fingers in rhythm, his head bobbing slightly with the beat.

Jimin, always one to lose himself in the music, was mouthing along softly, his focus entirely on the song.

But Taehyung?

Taehyung was watching Jungkook.

And that’s when he noticed it.

At first, it was nothing. Just Jungkook listening intently, nodding along, reacting like anyone hearing a song for the first time.

But then—during the pre-chorus, as the song built toward the drop, Jungkook’s fingers tapped exactly in sync with the transition.

Not like someone figuring out the beat.

Like someone who already knew what was coming.

Taehyung’s eyes narrowed slightly.

Still, that alone wasn’t enough.

Maybe it was just coincidence. Maybe Jungkook had a natural sense of rhythm.

But then—the bridge.

That was when Taehyung saw it.

A single, almost imperceptible slip.

Jungkook’s lips moved.

It was brief, almost unnoticeable, the shape of his mouth forming a word a fraction of a second before the vocals hit.

Not a full lyric.

Not a clear mouthing of the words.

Just the beginning of a syllable—cut off quickly, like an instinct he had stopped too late.

Taehyung froze.

His fingers tightened subtly around the edge of the table.

His breath hitched just slightly.

Because it was one thing to subconsciously tap along to a beat.

But this?

This was something else.

This was a mistake that only someone who had already heard the song before would make.

And in the eyes of the others, Jungkook was supposed to be hearing it for the first time.

Taehyung’s mind raced.

It all made sense.

Jungkook’s knowledge of stage lighting. His familiarity with formations and movement.

And now, this tiny slip-up.

It was all lining up too well, but… he had no real proof.

There was no undeniable evidence. No moment he could point to and say, “This is it. This proves it.”

All he had were theories and coincidences—but ones that felt far too accurate to ignore.

Still, he didn’t feel deceived.

Just… surprised…because if Jungkook really was Ian, if he really had been hiding this all along…

It wasn’t about tricking them.

It was something else.

Something Taehyung didn’t fully understand yet.

Even so, he didn’t plan on telling the others.

Not yet.

This was something he wanted to figure out on his own.

So instead of reacting, instead of making it obvious that he had caught something—

Taehyung leaned back in his chair, forcing himself to appear just as absorbed in the song as the others.

For you, I could pretend like I was happy when I was sad

For you, I could pretend like I was strong when I was hurt

I wish love was perfect as love itself

I wish all my weaknesses could be hidden

I grew a flower that can’t be bloomed in a dream

That can't come true

Jin and Jungkooks combined voices ended the song. Then the others looked at Jungkook who acted taken back though he did forget how good the ending of his and Jin’s voice was.

“Wow, this is amazing hyungs!” He smiled at them.

“It’s definitely darker than Blood sweat and tears and my guess is that it will be harder to sing hearing those high notes,” he teased, though he knew it too well.

“You have no idea how hard it was for us as vocalists,” Jimin sat down.

“Even Ian struggled a little in some parts too, but we did it and it’s great huh!” Jin smiles.

“I can imagine,” he comments.

“This is really good and I think you guys will do amazing out there at the party with these two songs. Something good will come as expected of you all!” Jungkook added.

The conversation naturally shifted into easy chatter, the weight of the song momentarily replaced by lighthearted teasing and laughter.

Jin, still riding the high of their completed track, stood up with a dramatic stretch. “Alright, now that we’ve officially finished tutoring and shown off our hard work, I vote we chill for a bit before heading out.”

“I second that,” Yoongi muttered, already reaching for his phone.

“I third it!” Hoseok grinned. “No rush, right?”

Jungkook chuckled, leaning back against his chair, grateful for the break. These moments—where they weren’t discussing music, performing, or studying—were rare, and he found himself enjoying them more than he expected.

They spent the next half-hour just hanging out, sprawled across Jin’s apartment in various positions.

Yoongi half-asleep on the couch.

Jimin and Hoseok scrolling through videos on their phones.

Jin and Namjoon arguing over whether pineapple belonged on pizza.

Jungkook and Taehyung sitting nearby, mostly listening, occasionally throwing in a comment.

It was comfortable, natural.

But through it all, Jungkook couldn’t shake the slight prickle of awareness.

Because even as the conversation bounced around, Taehyung wasn’t quite acting like the rest.

He wasn’t being obvious. But Jungkook could feel it.

The way Taehyung’s eyes flickered toward him every so often.

Th e way he seemed thoughtful, quiet—not in his usual relaxed way, but like he was piecing something together.

Still, Taehyung didn’t say anything.

And so, Jungkook didn’t either.

Two hours later, they began heading out one by one, each bidding Jin farewell at the door.

Laughter and casual goodbyes echoed through the hallway as they parted ways—their spirits lighter, their confidence in their academic skills noticeably improved.

All except for one.

Taehyung followed along with the natural rhythm of the group. He laughed, he spoke, and he even joked around with Jungkook—smooth, casual, easy.

But inside, his thoughts were anything but that.

Now, alone in his car, the gentle hum of the engine was the only sound accompanying him as he drove through the dimly lit streets. But his mind...

His mind was racing.

He replayed everything—from the moment those first seeds of doubt were planted to the most recent signs that had kept piling up like puzzle pieces waiting to fit together.

Everything circled back to today’s session.

Jungkook’s explanations.
His reaction to Fake Love.

That tiny slip—the way he phrased things, too naturally, too confidently.

The water bottle weeks ago—labeled with the initials JJK.

Too many coincidences. Too many subtle moments where Jungkook seemed to know more than he let on.

Taehyung’s grip tightened around the steering wheel as the thought came back stronger than ever.

It would make sense if Jungkook was Ian.

Ian was a mystery. A performer who wore a mask, never revealed his face, and thrived in the spotlight—while remaining hidden.

At first, Taehyung had chalked it up to branding. An artistic decision.

But now?

Now, he saw it differently.

Because Jungkook was shy.

Not in a way that made him invisible, but in a way that made him hesitant. Quiet. Thoughtful.
He never sought attention, and when he had it, he often redirected it toward others.

What if Jungkook loved performing—but not being seen?

What if Ian wasn’t just a persona... but a shield?

A way to separate the performer from the person.

To be seen without being recognized.

To perform without judgment.

And suddenly, the pieces fell into place.

The way Jungkook had described stage lighting—not like a student, but like someone who had stood under those lights.

The way he understood formation dynamics so well—like someone who had physically been part of them.

The way he reacted to Fake Love—not with surprise, but with something far more subtle. Familiarity.

Even Ian’s stage presence—the way he carried himself—reminded Taehyung of Jungkook, just… freer.

And in that moment, it truly sank in.

If Ian was Jungkook, then this wasn’t about deceiving anyone.

This was about protection.

Jungkook hadn’t told anyone because he wasn’t ready to be seen.

Taehyung exhaled, his grip loosening slightly on the wheel as he stopped at a red light.

His mind settled—for a moment—into something that felt like certainty.

But then...

What if he was wrong?

What if he was reaching?
Overanalyzing? Stringing together coincidences that had no real connection?

After all, he didn’t have proof.

Not really.

There were differences too—ones that gave him pause.

Jungkook’s eyes were a warm, deep brown. Ian’s were blue. Sure, it could be colored contacts, but they’d always looked natural. Too natural.

And while they had similar builds, hair, and even height, they still hadn’t seen Ian up close enough to be sure.

Ian existed in the shadows—just out of reach.

Taehyung sighed, leaning back in his seat as the light turned red.

He didn’t know what to think anymore.

His theory made sense. It felt right.

But it wasn’t airtight. Not yet.

There were still threads left loose, questions unanswered.

And until he had something concrete—something undeniable—he would keep it to himself.

Because if he was right, Jungkook would reveal it in time.

And if he was wrong...

Then it was just a theory, after all.

Two days later: Friday

The hallway buzzed with the familiar shuffle of students packing up after a long lecture. Bags zipped, chairs scraped, and scattered conversations filled the space as Taehyung stepped out of the classroom with a soft yawn, stretching his arms behind his head.

“Still surviving, Tae?”

Taehyung looked to his right and saw Wooshik, one of his close friends from outside the group, slinging his bag over his shoulder with his usual lopsided grin.

“Barely,” Taehyung smirked. “That class felt like a lifetime.”

“Right?” Wooshik laughed before nudging him lightly. “Hey, by the way… me, Hyunwoo, and a few others were planning to hit that club near the east district tonight. It’s been forever since you came with us. You down?”

Taehyung blinked. “Tonight?”

“Yes! We’ve all been so hard on midterms that we wanted to unwind and since we haven’t hanged with you in a while, we thought you’d want to join us! No pressure or anything but it will be fun! Wooshik responded.

“I’m in. I could use some distraction from school and other things..” Taehyung replied with a smile. It has been just two weeks since he last was at the club and watched the last performance of Ian, but if he was to be performing he could watch things in more detail.

Not that he was only going for that, he truly wanted to have some fun with his other friends but if Ian is performing then he could kill two birds with one stone.

Maybe it was time to watch things closer in detail lens.

“Nice! We will pick you up at around 7:00pm today! Don’t forget to dress well!” Wooshik squeezed his shoulder.

Tae rolled his eyes before answering in a sassy confident tone, “please! Don’t I always! Do you not know me?!”

Wooshik laughed.

He hoped Ian would be there tonight.

Not to interrogate—just to see.

To confirm. Or deny.

“Can’t wait then!” Wooshik beamed. “Let’s just hope he shows up tonight. Anyway—7 p.m.! Don’t ghost me!” he added, pointing at Taehyung as he started to walk off.

Taehyung chuckled and gave a two-finger salute. “I won’t. See you then.”

They parted ways, each heading in opposite directions. But as Taehyung walked off, his pace slowed ever so slightly.

Because now, tonight had a different kind of weight.

And he wasn’t sure if he was more excited…

or curious.

-

-

-

The sky was painted in soft streaks of pink, orange, yellow, and fading blue as Jungkook pulled into the club’s parking lot. The golden hues of the sunset filtered through the windshield, casting a warm light across his hands as they rested on the steering wheel.

With a smooth motion, he turned into a spot near the back, pressed the engine button to shut the car off, and unbuckled his seatbelt.

Another night. Another performance. Another transformation into Ian.

He had been doing this for months now—balancing the dual lives of student, tutor, and masked performer.

But lately, he had begun to feel it more. The physical toll. The mental weight.

Working with the others during the week, keeping up with classes, then slipping away into the world of Ian on weekends.

It wasn’t a surprise. He knew what he signed up for when he chose this path. He wasn’t the type to complain.

Still… it was a lot.

As he walked through the back entrance, he greeted the few familiar staff he passed—offering them a polite bow and a tired smile.

The club’s owner gave him a nod of approval as he passed, and Jungkook made his way down the narrow hallway toward the dressing room.

Inside, Chunghee—Mingyu’s cousin and, by now, his unofficial stylist—was already unpacking products at the vanity.

“There you are!” she said with a warm grin as he stepped in. “You’re early today.”

“Hi, noona,” he replied with a laugh, dropping his bag onto the couch. “Looks like you won’t have to rush helping me switch from Ian to Jungkook this time.”

“Ooh, really? Your other friends aren’t coming tonight?”

He shook his head. “No. They don’t come to every performance—which, thank God, because handling both personas when they’re around is exhausting.”

He sat down, pulling out his clothes. “I mean, I don’t mind them watching me perform. I literally practice with them, so it’s not like they don’t know I can sing or dance. But it’s just… the pressure of keeping Ian and Jungkook separate. Especially when they start asking if they can meet Ian too…” He let out a sigh. “It’s a lot. But hey—I signed up for it, right?”

He smiled weakly, even though the weight of what he wasn’t saying sat heavy in his chest.

He wasn’t ready to tell them. Not yet.

Chunghee gave him a knowing look. “I get it. But… I still hope you tell them someday. At least Jin, don’t you think?”

Jungkook nodded silently, eyes lowering with a flicker of guilt. “Yeah. I know. I hear it a lot.”

“But hey,” she added quickly, trying to lift the mood, “at least you’re not performing every single week anymore. Every two weeks gives you a breather.”

“Exactly,” he said, relaxing a bit. “I didn’t want to burn out completely.”

“Smart. Now go change so I can get started on makeup and hair.” She waved a hand toward the changing area inside the dressing room.

“Yes, ma’am.” He gave her a playful salute before heading inside with his outfit. “Got it, noona.”

He felt good tonight. Calm.

Most nights he had a steady confidence going in, but this one felt… lighter.

That is—until he started changing.

Somewhere between pulling on his pants and buttoning the top of his shirt, a strange wave of nerves hit him.

Subtle. Unprovoked.

His fingers hesitated slightly on the fabric, and he paused, frowning to himself.

Where did that come from?

Just moments ago, he’d felt composed. Ready. Maybe it was excitement. Maybe it was nothing. But the way his stomach tightened… it didn’t feel like nothing.

He shook his head, forcing the thought away.

Now wasn’t the time to overthink. He had a stage to own.

He adjusted his shoes and looked at himself in the mirror. He had chosen a casual outfit for tonight: black jeans, a tucked-in black t-shirt, and a loose blue unbuttoned shirt.

“I guess this is good,” he said, adjusting the unbuttoned shirt and heading out.

“Okay, I’m done, noona,” he said, walking out and heading to the chair. Chunghee, who had been looking at her phone, looked up and smiled.

“Oo, look at you more casual today, huh? Nice. Anyway, maybe add your eye contacts first, and then I’ll get started on your hair,” she said, going over and softly brushing her hands through his hair, trying to figure out what style would suit him.

After playing with his hair for a while, she nodded when she had an idea. She then left to grab some of her tools. Jungkook began putting each contact in and blinking quickly to make sure they adjusted well. He blinked a few more times and looked at the mirror, nodding.

Chunghee started getting him ready. As she styled his hair, she noticed Jungkook bouncing his knees. Although Mingyu had told him it was a habit, he also saw him biting his lip slightly.

“You okay? You nervous?” she asked, taking a glance at him in the mirror as she continued styling his hair.

He nodded. “I am. Usually, I’m calm, but somehow, as I was dressing, some waves of nerves hit me, and I don’t understand why…” he pouted.

“I was fine, and it was just him. As the time goes on, I’m feeling a little more nervous, but at the same time, I wonder if it’s me masking my excitement because it’s been two weeks since I’ve done a show. It’s weird… I’m weird,” he chuckled.

Chunghee smiles warmly.

“It’s perfectly normal to experience both nervousness and excitement at times, and it’s okay not to know which one you’re feeling. You’ll do great either way, though! You always have,” she encourages him.

“Thanks, noona! Maybe it will subside soon once I step onto the stage…” he says.

“I’m certain it will!” Chunghee pats his shoulder reassuringly.

Meanwhile, as Jungkook was getting ready backstage, the club was beginning to fill up.

The bass pulsed through the walls, vibrant lights flashing across the dim interior as people swayed on the dance floor, drinks already in hand.

At 7:30 sharp, Taehyung and his friends stepped inside, the rush of sound and energy washing over them.

“Damn, I forgot how alive this place is,” Wooshik shouted over the music, eyes wide as they made their way toward an open table.

Taehyung smiled faintly as the music pulsed around them. “This place is always alive,” he said, scanning the crowd.

The club’s energy was contagious—but his mind wasn’t just on the fun.

He was watching. Waiting.

And wondering if tonight, Ian would appear.

Taehyung followed Wooshik and Hyunwoo through the crowd until they found a semi-private table tucked to the side of the main floor—close enough to see the stage clearly, but far enough to hold a conversation without yelling.

They all dropped into their seats, laughter and commentary flowing effortlessly.

“Okay, this place hasn’t changed a bit,” Hyunwoo grinned, pulling off his jacket. “Still the same music, same sweaty crowd, same overpriced drinks.”

“And still no regrets,” Wooshik added with a smirk as he waved a server over. “First round’s on me, since I’m the one who forced Tae to show up.”

“I’m not that hard to convince,” Taehyung replied, his lips curling into a half-smile as he leaned back in his seat. “I needed a night out anyway.”

As the server took their drink orders and left, Wooshik leaned across the table. “So… think Ian’s actually performing tonight?”

“Hope so,” Hyunwoo said. “We came early for a reason. Heard he usually shows up around this time if he’s on the roster.”

Taehyung sipped his water, playing it cool. “We’ll find out soon enough.”

“Man, I’ve seen the clips,” Wooshik added, eyes wide. “But seeing him live is different, right? You’ve seen him in person, yeah?”

“A couple times,” Taehyung said, casually tapping his fingers against the glass. “He’s… intense. Definitely not like anyone else who performs here.”

Wooshik looked around the room, eyes squinting toward the staff moving near the side stage entrance. “Do you think he’s here now? Or already backstage?”

“Probably,” Taehyung murmured.

His gaze drifted toward the dark hallway tucked behind the stage, where only staff and performers had access.

Somewhere back there, if his theory was right… Jungkook was preparing.

His friends continued chatting around him, going on about the drinks, the playlist, the crowd—but Taehyung’s focus lingered elsewhere.

He wasn’t here just for the drinks or music.

He was waiting for the mask.

For the walk.

For the voice.

Waiting for the moment he could finally tell if what he believed was true.

If Ian was really who he thought he was.

As time passed, the lights dimmed, casting an even darker tone across the stage. Suddenly, the main stage flashed to life, revealing Ian as the performer.

“Oh! Looks like Ian will be performing!” Hyunwoo exclaimed, standing up like everyone else.

“We got lucky, or you guys did! Be prepared to be completely blown away!” Taehyung genuinely commented. Despite anticipating to prove or disprove his theory, he knew Ian was talented, and his friends would undoubtedly witness his skills.

Meanwhile, backstage, Jungkook adjusted his in-ear headphones and microphone. He gave a thumbs up to his background dancers, who nodded in acknowledgment, assuring him they were ready.

Jungkook nodded back, taking a deep breath. Despite his lingering nerves, he forced himself to calm down. He was certain it was just excitement, but deep down, maybe it was a mix of nerves he didn’t want to admit.

As the MC introduced him, Jungkook stepped onto the stage, accompanied by his dancers. The stage remained dark as he waited for the beat of the song and the stage lights to illuminate the performance.

The lights cut through the dim club like a blade, casting sharp white beams across the stage as the first chords of “Me and My Broken Heart” thrummed from the speakers.

The crowd’s volume swelled in anticipation.

Then he stepped out.

Ian.

Dressed in sleek black jeans, a fitted shirt beneath a loose blue overshirt, he moved with quiet confidence, his eyes scanning the crowd from behind the mask.

The microphone rose to his lips as the first lyrics left his mouth—rich, gritty, and aching.

All I need’s a little love in my life…

From their table, Wooshik and Hyunwoo immediately leaned forward.

“Holy—his voice sounds even better than the videos,” Hyunwoo muttered, already impressed.

“He’s got stage presence, I’ll give him that,” Wooshik said, nodding along, eyes wide. “That voice is insane.”

Taehyung didn’t say anything. He was already watching too closely.

He’d seen Ian perform before. Twice.

And every time, he walked away a little more uncertain—but also, a little more intrigued.

Even now, knowing all he knew about Jungkook, his theory still felt like that: a theory. A strong one. A convincing one. But not confirmed.

Because while the build matched, and the voice had similar tonal warmth to the way Jungkook sometimes spoke or sang softly at karaoke—Taehyung had never actually seen Jungkook perform like this.

He had no real baseline to compare.

What if Jungkook wasn’t even a performer like this?

What if he was just a tutor with a good voice and stage knowledge?

And yet… Ian felt so familiar.

Too familiar.

The way he controlled his breath between lyrics.

The emotional flickers that passed through his expression when he wasn’t dancing.

The fluidity in the way he moved—not flashy, but precise. Like someone who’d studied others and perfected his own style in silence.

As the crowd cheered, the song shifted without pause into the next—

“There’s Nothing Holdin’ Me Back.”

Ian came alive.

His energy exploded with the opening guitar riff. His dance became sharper, more electric. He owned the stage like it was home.

“He can dance too?” Hyunwoo laughed in disbelief. “Alright, I get the hype now.”

“I’d kill to move like that,” Wooshik muttered, eyes wide.

But Taehyung didn’t speak. He was too focused.

He looked at Ian’s hands—how they moved through the air, how he pointed toward the crowd, how he adjusted the mic stand.

He listened to his breaths—if they were similar to the way Jungkook laughed.

He watched how he interacted with the dancers—if any subconscious ticks matched the Jungkook he knew.

But there was nothing concrete.

Nothing undeniable.

He wasn’t sure if he was projecting—seeing what he wanted to see.

But still… the feeling sat in his chest.

What if it was him?

The crowd screamed as Ian leaned close to the front edge of the stage, voice soaring.

Taehyung’s eyes narrowed slightly.

That moment… there was something in it. A flicker of something human, unguarded.

Then the final track started—

“What Do You Mean.”

The playful beat had the crowd instantly hooked. Ian’s demeanor shifted smoothly, movements looser, more flirtatious.

He smirked under the mask, dancing with just the right touch of charm.

The crowd fed off his energy. Hands were in the air. Fans cheered and sang along.

He glided across the stage, switching between sharp choreography and smooth transitions, making the entire performance feel like one cohesive story.

Taehyung watched it all—still trying to find it. The undeniable sign.

But Ian was good.

Too good.

He gave nothing away.

And when the lights cut off at the final beat, and the club erupted into applause—Taehyung was left still unsure.

He clapped along with the others, but his thoughts were somewhere else entirely.

His friends turned to him, grinning.

“Dude. That was insane,” Wooshik said. “No way that guy’s not already famous somewhere.”

“Seriously. He’s got it all,” Hyunwoo added. “Makes you wonder who he really is, huh?”

Taehyung nodded slowly, still watching the now-empty stage.

It did.

It really did.

Because even after all his analysis, all his doubts, all his certainty—he still didn’t know for sure.

But something inside him whispered:

“You’ve seen this before. You just didn’t know it at the time.”

The applause was still fading when Taehyung’s eyes drifted once more toward the hallway behind the stage—the one only performers and staff had access to.

Ian had just disappeared through it.

But something in Taehyung wouldn’t let it go.

He still didn’t know for sure.

He had watched, analyzed, picked apart every gesture—and yet it still felt like the truth was just out of reach.

Unless… he followed it.

“I’ll be right back,” he said quickly, pushing back from the table.

Wooshik blinked. “Bathroom?”

“Yeah.”

“Try not to get lost in the crowd,” Hyunwoo joked as Taehyung slipped away.

But Taehyung didn’t laugh.

His mind was racing, his eyes locked on the hallway just as a staff member exited through the side door. He timed it perfectly, slipping in behind someone carrying equipment, blending into the chaos backstage.

The hallway was dimly lit, the music muffled.

He could hear voices. Some laughter. A cheer from a dancer further down.

And then—

A voice.

Soft, familiar.

So normal. So unmasked.

“…Thanks, hyung. I felt really good up there tonight.”

Taehyung froze.

That voice.

He knew that voice.

His heart stuttered in his chest.

Was he hallucinating?

There was a shuffle of movement, and then another voice called out casually:

“Jungkook, good job. The crowd loved you tonight.”

Taehyung’s breath caught.

Jungkook.

The name hit like a slap—loud in the quiet corridor.

He stood frozen at the corner, half in shadow, barely breathing.

And then he saw him.

The blue overshirt. The black jeans. The way he tilted his head when he listened.

It was Ian. Still dressed from the performance.

But the mask was off.

And the voice…

It wasn’t polished or disguised or controlled.

It was just Jungkook.

His Jungkook.

Taehyung stepped forward before he could stop himself, the word tumbling out on instinct—

“Jungkook?”

The hallway fell silent.

The person ahead of him turned.

Jungkook’s eyes widened. He then turned, with some anxiety, to see Taehyung's stunned expression, his eyes widening a little more when he saw Jungkook fully.

And for a moment, neither of them moved.

The truth stood fully between them now—undeniable, raw, and irreversible.

Chapter Text

Jungkook slipped off stage, his chest rising and falling with the aftershocks of adrenaline.

His in-ears were still in, muting the chaotic sound of cheers behind him as he walked quickly through the back hallway, surrounded by dancers and crew.

He tugged one earbud out, letting the sound of voices and laughter gradually sink in. Someone clapped him on the back. “You killed it tonight, man.”

He smiled and bowed his head politely. “Thanks,” he then proceeded to remove his mask. 

Another staff member—one of the regular stagehands—grinned as he passed by and called out casually:

“Jungkook, good job. The crowd loved you tonight.”

He gave a soft “thank you” back, not thinking anything of it.

By now, being called Jungkook backstage felt normal again. The people here all knew. He didn’t have to be Ian once he stepped off the stage.

The tension in his body was just beginning to loosen, and he was a few steps away from the dressing room when he heard it—

“Jungkook?”

The sound of his name—spoken in a voice that didn’t belong to any staff or dancer—froze him mid-step.

His heart dropped straight to his stomach.

It wasn’t said casually. It wasn’t mumbled or misheard.

It was clear. Familiar.

Taehyung.

Slowly, he turned.

And there he was.

Standing halfway down the corridor, eyes wide, lips parted in disbelief.

“Tae I—“ Jungkook begins, but his mind races, unsure of how to proceed. He watches as the other person, still in shock, slowly approaches him, glancing up and down.

“So, you’ve truly been Ian all along? You are Ian…” he breathes, his heart pounding. Jungkook sighs, knowing he can’t make excuses or lie right now. He nods, unable to deny the truth.

Can we talk?” he asked, stepping closer. “Just… give me a few minutes to change. I promise I’m not going to run. I know I owe you an explanation.”

Taehyung gave a slight nod, still unable to form words.

Yes, he had predicted it.

Yes, he had theorized. But confirmation hit differently.

Seeing Jungkook—Ian—standing before him without a mask… it unsettled something in him. The shock wasn’t in being wrong. It was in realizing he’d been right all along.

Jungkook offered a small, grateful glance before disappearing into his dressing room, the door softly closing behind him.

Inside, he exhaled sharply, heart pounding so loudly he could hear it in his ears. Now he understood why he’d felt so unsettled all evening. This moment was always coming. He just hadn’t known it would be tonight.

As he peeled off his stage clothes and pulled on a hoodie, joggers, and sneakers, the adrenaline started to fade—but the weight of the reveal settled deeper.

He wasn’t afraid that Taehyung would tell the others.

But he wasn’t ready for them to know. He wasn’t even sure if he was ready to face it himself fully. And yet—Taehyung had seen him, truly seen him. He couldn’t take that back.

Outside, Taehyung stood still, mind spinning.

He had questions—a thousand of them—but none of them came together clearly. Instead, he did the only thing he could think to do. He pulled out his phone and quickly texted his friends.

[Sorry, something came up. Emergency. I’ll explain later. Raincheck on tonight? I owe you.]

He put the phone away with shaking fingers just as the dressing room door opened.

Jungkook stepped out—not in stagewear or sleek performance gear, but in a plain oversized hoodie, soft joggers, and a pair of well-worn Nikes.

The dramatic eyeliner, the styled hair, and those vivid blue contacts remained—a trace of Ian clinging to him. But everything else was unmistakably, vulnerably… Jungkook. Taehyung met his eyes.

Jungkook stopped a few steps away.

The silence between them hung heavy, but not hostile. Just real.

“Is anyone else here with you?” Jungkook asked, a hint of fear in his voice.

Taehyung shook his head.

“No, it’s just me. Some friends of mine invited me to hang out tonight, and this place was their chosen spot. I honestly didn’t expect you to be performing today either.”

“I see. Can we go talk outside of here?” Jungkook asked quietly.

“Let’s go,” Taehyung replied as he walked to the exit with Jungkook. Instead of going to their cars, they walked to a nearby park that was lit up.

The two walked out of the club in silence, the weight of unspoken truths pressing between them. Instead of heading toward their cars, they veered toward a nearby park just down the street. Golden lights softly illuminated the path, and the quiet hum of the city was in the background.

They stopped near a bench under a tree, a soft breeze brushing past them.

Jungkook turned to him. “Before I begin… what do you want to know?”

Taehyung slid his hands into his jacket pockets, gaze steady.

“Honestly?” he said. “Everything. Why Ian? Why keep it hidden? Why haven’t you told anyone? I have my guesses… but want to hear from you.”

Jungkook gave a slow nod, swallowing before speaking.

“Alright… then I’ll start from the beginning.”

He exhaled, grounding himself.

“I have always had a passion for performing—be it singing, dancing, any form that allows me to convey my emotions. As a child, I looked up to idols. Watching artists on stage inspired me; I wanted to experience that myself. I even managed to persuade my busy parents, who were seldom home, to enroll me in vocal and dance lessons. Surprisingly, they agreed and never discouraged my dreams.”

He took a brief pause, his voice becoming softer, “However, performing requires more than just love. You need confidence, resilience, and the ability to handle criticism while continuing to push forward. For a time… I had all of that.”

His gaze dropped momentarily. “Until I didn’t.”

Taehyung listened in silence, observing him intently.

“There was a specific moment,” he murmured quietly. “One that changed everything for me.”

Taehyung remained still, focused on Jungkook without blinking.

“It took place during a talent show at school,” Jungkook explained. “In middle school. I dedicated a lot of time to it—rehearsing choreography, getting the music right. I chose a song I loved, something lively and empowering.”

He gave a bitter smile. “And I was proud of it. Nervous, of course, but proud. It marked the first time I would perform as myself. Just… Jungkook.”

He exhaled slowly, “Yet, halfway through my performance, the audience began to laugh. Not cheering, not booing. Just plain laughter. At first, I was confused—I assumed something must have gone wrong with the music or the microphone.”

His jaw clenched, “But it was me they were laughing at. My dance moves, the way I performed. Someone filmed the entire thing, and by the next lunch period, it had spread throughout the school.”

He paused for a moment, “They branded me embarrassing. Claimed I was trying too hard. Criticized my voice for cracking at points. I’ll never forget someone shouting from the audience—‘sit down, you’re not meant for this.’”

Taehyung felt a tightness in his chest, his hands gripping deeper into his pockets.

“I kept telling myself it was just one performance,” Jungkook continued, his voice noticeably softer. “But the mockery persisted. It became a regular thing. Walking down the hall, I would hear people humming the song I sang—mocking it. Mocking me.”

His voice wavered, if only briefly. “And that was the turning point. That’s when I resolved to stop dreaming like that. Not out loud, not as my true self.”

A heavy silence settled between them, yet it felt necessary.

“Since that day,” Jungkook said softly, “I’ve harbored many insecurities. Even though high school wasn’t as cruel, it didn’t alleviate the pressure. By then, I had already stepped away from performing, but I was still subject to judgment, just in subtler ways. They called me dull and too shy, too quiet. I wasn’t bullied like in middle school—at least, not overtly—but I was ignored. I had no friends. I was a loner.”

He took a deep breath, as if trying to dissipate the weight in his chest.

“Eventually, I became the person I am today. By high school, I had Jin-hyung. We met at the end of middle school, and he was a senior when I started. Even then, I kept my distance in school. I didn’t want to tarnish his reputation. He was popular, self-assured, and respected. I—well, I wasn’t.”

He let out a weak chuckle tinged with guilt, “I would cling to him after school, but during the day, I remained isolated. I always found excuses to explain why I avoided him around other people.”

His gaze shifted to Taehyung, eyes reflecting vulnerability.

“That experience in middle school… and everything that came afterward in high school—it shattered whatever confidence I had left. Any dreams of standing on stage as my true self vanished.”

He swallowed hard before continuing, his voice low but firm.

“I believed I wasn’t meant for that world. No matter how much I loved performing, I thought I would never be skilled enough. So, when I went to college, I chose a different major. I couldn’t pursue performing arts; the fear was too overwhelming.”

His hands fidgeted nervously in his lap.

“But then… I met you all. Watching you perform, especially during that end-of-year showcase, ignited something within me once more; the longing to perform surged back, but so did the anxiety. I still felt terrified. I was exhausted from hiding, but I had no idea how to feel confident in my own skin.”

He paused, casting a glance at the night sky.

"After that showcase, I told Eunwoo and Mingyu... that I missed it. I wondered if I wasn't cut out for it, wishing I could be like them—confident and talented enough to take the stage." 

He gave a faint smile.

"And Eunwoo replied, 'Why not try pretending to be someone else?"

Jungkook locked eyes with Taehyung again. 

"That sparked the idea for Ian. I created someone I aspired to be—a version of myself that felt genuine yet safe. This persona could take risks without reflecting poorly on Jungkook." 

He chuckled softly, almost in disbelief. 

"So, I chose the name Ian. I changed my style, wore a mask, and reassured myself that if I failed, no one would know it was me. No one could judge Jungkook. Surprisingly, people loved it. They loved him." 

He paused, his smile becoming softer. 

"I’m still amazed that Ian resonates with people. In middle school, no one saw my potential; they laughed at me. But now... it feels different." 

Emotion flickered in his eyes as he shifted. 

"I continued performing, show after show. Not just because of Ian's popularity, but because I truly loved being back on stage. That feeling evolved into more than just hiding; it became a way for me to prove to myself that maybe I am good enough. Someday, I hope to perform not as Ian... but as myself."

"I don’t get it, though," Taehyung said softly. "Why haven't you told Jin-hyung? He would’ve supported you. He’d be proud—I'm sure of it. Why keep it from him?"

Jungkook looked down, fidgeting with his hands before responding. 

"I know," he whispered. "I know he’d be proud and support me without a second thought. He’s always been that way." 

He paused, his expression conflicted as he lifted his gaze slightly. 

"But that's part of the issue, hyung. He’s already done so much for me—more than I can count— and I didn’t want to lean on him this time, even unintentionally. It’s not a matter of distrust, but rather a desire to prove to myself that I can do this on my own." 

He took a breath, trying to collect his thoughts. 

"I wanted to show him I’m okay. That I’ve grown. That the things he believed in... they worked. I wanted to surprise him, to come one day and say, ‘Look—I did this. It’s thanks to you, but I did it my way.’"

Jungkook's voice wavered as he added, "I know it probably sounds strange..."

"No, it makes sense," Taehyung replied gently, but Jungkook felt compelled to continue. 

"In a sense, I didn't want his guidance—not because I didn’t want advice, but because I didn’t want this to feel... easier. I needed to struggle through it and confront my fears. I've spent so long believing I wasn’t enough that if someone caught me before I fell, how could I learn to rise?" 

His voice dropped again. 

"It's not that I don't trust him. I trust Jin-hyung more than anyone—he feels like a brother. But I needed this to be mine." 

Then, the weight of his hesitation settled in, worry dimming his eyes. 

"Now that it has gone on for so long, I’m scared to tell him. I don’t want him to think I didn’t trust him or, worse, that I didn’t need him. I fear he’ll be upset, even though I know deep down that he likely won't be. The truth is..." he sighed, his voice trembling slightly, "I still feel like I have more to prove, like I haven’t earned the right to show him yet." 

"I understand," Taehyung said softly. "You didn’t want to depend on anyone else. You wanted to achieve this independently... and that’s a challenging thing to do." 

His tone held no judgment—just quiet empathy. 

He hesitated before asking, "Is that why you kept your distance from us? Why you didn’t speak much—just greeted us politely but never stayed long? We noticed, but... was that the real reason?"

Jungkook nodded slowly. "Yeah… that was it." 

He lowered his gaze to his hands, his voice now softer. 

"I mean... it's trauma, I know. But you all are so talented, hyung. You're insanely skilled and confident. People admire you for a reason. You’re smart, charismatic, and, objectively, quite attractive too," he chuckled faintly, attempting to lighten the mood. 

"I guess I kept thinking the same way I did in high school. If I joined your group... people would talk. They’d question why someone like me was around someone like you. I know it’s different in college, yet you all still hold a certain status here. I didn’t want to weigh you down or let others judge you because of my presence." 

Taehyung frowned, feeling his heart tighten, but before he could respond, he pointed out, "But now you spend more time with us—even outside of tutoring sessions. That means something, doesn’t it?"

Jungkook nodded again, this time more slowly.

“It does,” he confessed. “I often feel insecure. I wonder if my presence tarnishes your reputation. But I've also come to a realization…”

He gazed at Taehyung, his demeanor now more open.

“If I want to be truly confident, I need to embrace that as Jungkook, not just Ian. I can’t only grow in the spotlight or behind a façade. I must do it in everyday life. With people. With friends. Even when it feels uncomfortable.”

After a brief pause, he continued, his voice quieter yet more vulnerable,

“And my guilt… it’s been gnawing at me. Particularly with Jin-hyung, but also with all of you. I’ve already concealed Ian from him—and that alone is burdensome. It feels unfair to keep myself distanced from the people he cares about. The ones he hoped I would know and connect with.”

His smile was small, yet genuine.

“And honestly… I do enjoy your company. A lot.” 

“So… yeah,” Jungkook said softly. “That’s the reason I keep Ian a secret. It’s why I still do. Because I’m not ready yet. But I am trying. Slowly… I’m getting there.”

He paused, taking a slow breath before carrying on, his tone carrying a hint of guilt.

“I’m sorry for lying. For keeping you all in the dark. I know it’s not right, even if I didn’t mean to cause harm. I just… I can’t bring myself to show you who I truly am. Not yet,” He looked at Taehyung, his eyes earnest. 

“It’s the same reason with Jin-hyung. I want to prove something. I realize I’ve probably already shown it—but my mind doesn’t operate that way. I just… I needed to demonstrate it. To feel like I earned it. I know this thinking isn’t the healthiest, but it’s the truth. And I apologize for dragging you into it.” 

However, Taehyung shook his head immediately, firm and unwavering. 

“You don’t need to apologize, Jungkook,” he emphasized. “I truly understand you. And I want to clarify something.”  

He stepped closer, his voice more passionate now. 

“What you’ve experienced? It wasn’t fair. It angers and saddens me to think someone as talented as you had to endure something that made you feel the need to hide,” He locked eyes with Jungkook. 

“You’re incredibly talented, Jungkook. Seriously. I’m not just referring to Ian-level talent. I mean you, in your own right,” He offered a small, sorrowful smile. 

“And I assure you—none of us care about what others might think. We don’t care about status or image. Not concerning you.” 

Taehyung’s voice softened.

“And what you’re doing… it’s not really deceit. It’s brave. You’re surviving and healing in the way you know best. Even when I began to suspect that Ian was actually you, I never felt annoyed. Not at all.” 

Jungkook blinked, taken aback. “Wait—suspicions? You knew? Or… guessed?” 

Taehyung chuckled. “I had my suspicions. I didn’t know for sure. But I suspected.” 

Jungkook looked startled. “How? I’ve been so cautious! Did I leave clues?” 

“No, not really,” Taehyung reassured with a grin. “You’re actually quite adept at covering your traces. Except for that one instance during dance practice… I saw your water bottle. It had the initials—‘JJK’—on it.” 

Jungkook winced, looking sheepish. “Ah… shoot.” 

Taehyung laughed lightly. “Don’t fret. The others are oblivious. Honestly, I think I’m simply more observant than they are. That’s all.”

He placed a hand on Jungkook’s shoulder, his tone softening again. 

“But truly… you don’t have to face all of this alone anymore. I mean it.” 

“Also,” Taehyung added with a gentle smile, “it all makes sense now. Why Ian fits so seamlessly with us. Because… you’re him.” 

Jungkook looked up, surprised by the warmth in Taehyung’s tone. 

“You’ve already fit in with us as Jungkook. That’s why, when you transform into Ian, everything aligns. The synergy, the energy—it’s inherently there. You’ve always been the missing link in our group, even if we didn’t realize it at first. I genuinely mean that.” 

He let out a quiet chuckle, shaking his head fondly. 

“We’ve always pondered how Ian could blend in with ease, how someone so enigmatic could fit in naturally. We didn’t know much about him, yet he felt like one of us. Now I understand why. It has always been you.” 

Jungkook took a moment to respond. He smiled faintly, overwhelmed with emotion. He hadn’t anticipated this level of acceptance—not this quickly, not this openly.  

Taehyung’s next words came gently but firmly. “And there’s no need for concern. I won’t reveal this to the others. I won’t take that away from you.” 

Jungkook blinked, surprised. “Really? You don’t have to do that.” 

“Maybe not,” Taehyung acknowledged, “but you’re not prepared. And I respect that. You should disclose this on your own timetables.” 

Then his tone softened with kindness. "But I do believe… you should tell Jin-hyung eventually. I know you’ve heard it before. I know you’re aware of it. But I think you’re closer to readiness than you realize.” 

He regarded Jungkook sincerely. 

“Bearing both Jungkook and Ian on your shoulders like this… it’ll wear you out eventually. You deserve to exist as you—without the burden of hiding.” 

Jungkook swallowed hard. He glanced down for a beat, then met Taehyung’s gaze. 

“I understand…” he murmured. “And I promise I will.” 

“Thank you, hyung,” Jungkook said softly, a genuine smile breaking through. “For listening… and for everything.” 

Taehyung returned the smile, his eyes warm. “I’m here for you. Always.” 

He paused briefly, then added with a playful tilt of his head, “And… I understand you might not really want help, but—could I offer just a bit?”

Jungkook raised an eyebrow, intrigued.

“I’m not suggesting I tell you what to do or anything,” Taehyung clarified quickly. “But perhaps I could assist in brainstorming ideas for future performances? Just tossing around concepts. Something enjoyable. I mean, you probably face moments when you're trying to decide what to perform next, right?”

Jungkook let out a guilty chuckle. “I do…”

“Then allow me to help in this way,” Taehyung said with a grin. “Only if it's alright with you, of course.”

Jungkook nodded, feeling lighter than he had all night. “Yeah… I’d appreciate that.”

As they walked in comfortable silence, Jungkook spoke up. “Thanks again for keeping my identity as Ian a secret, but I can’t help but feel guilty about how you’ll have to hide this information from the others…” Jungkook looked at him while Taehyung hummed in response.

“You really shouldn’t feel guilty, Jungkook.”

He stopped in his tracks, turning to face Taehyung fully. “Am I keeping something from the others? Yeah, technically. But this isn’t just about a secret. It’s about you. Protecting something that still needs room to grow.”

Taehyung lightly tapped Jungkook on the shoulder. “And if safeguarding that space means waiting a bit longer, then I’m all for it. No questions asked.”

Jungkook stared at him for a moment, warmth swelling in his chest. There were no grand declarations or promises of solutions—just a quiet understanding.

A shared truth. A silent vow.

Taehyung grinned, “Besides… I have to admit, it’s kind of cool being the only one who knows.”

Jungkook laughed, and this time it felt lighter, freer.

“Okay, fair,” he said, playfully nudging Taehyung back. “You’re officially Ian’s first accomplice.”

“Damn right I am,” Taehyung replied with pride, throwing him a teasing look. “But don’t think for a second that I won’t hold you accountable. You promised Jin-hyung, remember.”

“I know,” Jungkook replied softly, “and I will. Soon.”

They continued their walk beneath the warm city lights, their steps slower now but no longer burdened.

For the first time in a long while, Jungkook didn’t feel as if he were running from himself.

Since that night when Taehyung learned the truth, he and Jungkook had naturally started spending more time together. Of course, Jungkook still hung out with the rest of the group—both during tutoring sessions and casual get-togethers—and remained close with the 97-line. But lately, Taehyung had begun seeking him out more intentionally. Whether during group hangouts, breaks between classes, or moments outside the Ian rehearsals, Taehyung always seemed to make space for him.

Slowly, Jungkook started to do the same.

It wasn’t planned or forced. It just happened—and neither minded. Especially as Taehyung assisted him in brainstorming performance ideas, their bond solidified, rooted in quiet understanding.

For Jungkook, this was a relief. Having someone from the group who knew—who understood—provided a sense of peace he hadn’t realized he needed. It didn’t eliminate the pressure, but it lightened the burden.

Still, that peace came with guilt.

Because the one person who didn’t know—still didn’t know—was Jin. And sometimes, that thought crept in and twisted at his chest.

He reassured himself that his reasoning was valid. That it made sense. Jin might have unintentionally stepped in, attempting to guide or protect him—and Jungkook had wanted to assert his independence.

But even with this justification, he couldn’t help but ponder if Jin knowing would have eased things. If maybe—just maybe—he would have felt safer, stronger.

But it was too late for what-ifs. All he could do now was continue growing, keep performing, and build the confidence needed to tell Jin—and eventually, the others— the truth. “One step at a time,” Jungkook whispered to himself one night, reflecting on everything. “Just one step at a time.”

What Jungkook didn’t know was that Jin had noticed the shift too. He had quietly observed how Jungkook and Taehyung seemed to grow closer over the past couple of weeks, and honestly—he didn’t mind it at all. Even without knowing the cause of the change, it didn’t feel like something to question. Not yet.

Of course, Jin didn’t find this strange. Taehyung and Jimin both had to coordinate with Jungkook regularly since the three of them were in charge of tutoring sessions. But even with that excuse, there was something subtly different in Jungkook’s demeanor with Taehyung lately. He still interacted warmly with Jimin, but with Taehyung, he seemed looser, more open—less shy, less reserved.

It gave Jin hope.

Hope that perhaps, just perhaps, the younger boy was finally beginning to emerge from his shell.

As he looked across the table during their shared lunch, he saw it again—the quiet proof.

Taehyung and Jungkook sat side by side, their shoulders lightly brushing, sharing a packet of shrimp chips while huddled over Jungkook’s tablet. Taehyung pointed at something on the screen, brow raised. Jungkook chuckled, covering his mouth with a hand before gently nudging Taehyung with his elbow.

Jin smiled to himself.

He didn’t say anything—didn’t need to. He leaned back in his chair, allowing the moment to express itself. His chest swelled with quiet pride.

Whatever had shifted between them, it looked good on Jungkook.

He deserved this kind of ease.

He deserved to be seen—and to let himself be seen.

And it wasn’t just Jin who noticed; the others had picked up on it too. Even though Jungkook was gradually opening up to each of them, Taehyung seemed to draw it out of him more naturally and consistently, and none of them quite knew how or why. But it was a start. 

As Jungkook finished laughing at the video on the screen, he glanced down and noticed the time. His stomach dropped.  

Today’s dance practice was scheduled earlier than usual since the hyungs’ next class had been canceled—and he was free for the rest of the day. However, he’d forgotten to bring his Ian clothes with him. If he wanted to make it home and back before practice started, he’d need to leave right now.  

He looked at the others, who were engrossed in conversation, then at Jin, who had just pulled out his phone and began scrolling. Everyone was distracted. Perfect.  

He needed a clean excuse.  Jungkook pulled out his phone and furrowed his brows slightly. “Ah—I didn’t realize how late it got,” he said aloud, his voice calm yet casual.  

Taehyung looked up from the tablet, puzzled for half a second—then understanding flickered in his eyes. He gave a quiet nod.  

“You’ve got something, Ggukie?” Hoseok asked, glancing over at him.  

“Yeah,” Jungkook replied as he started gathering his things. “I totally forgot I promised my brother I’d FaceTime him today. He wanted to see something in my apartment, and I didn’t realize how much time had passed.”  

“Oh? Did you get something new?” Jimin asked curiously.  

Before Jungkook could respond, Jin looked up and added helpfully, “They upgraded the shower in his bathroom. I tried it last week—it’s pretty great. His building already had a good setup, but the owner insisted on remodeling.”  

Jungkook smiled, grateful for the assist. “Yup. It’s just a shower, honestly, but my brother’s weirdly excited about it. Guess he doesn’t have anything better to do today.”  

Taehyung chuckled, handing him back the tablet.  “Well, tell him the shower deserves five stars,” he teased.  

Jungkook grinned. “Will do.” He zipped up his bag, slung it over his shoulder, and gave them all a quick wave. “I’ll see you guys at practice later.”  

With that, he turned and slipped out, heart racing—but his face remained calm.  

He was getting better at this.  

The studio hummed with quiet energy when Jin arrived, gym bag slung over one shoulder. The overhead lights were on, and music played faintly through the speakers. They had a long rehearsal ahead—one of their final sessions to polish the Blood Sweat & Tears and Fake Love performances for the upcoming party.  

The boys had arrived just five minutes before their scheduled start time, stretching near the mirrors.  

A few minutes later, Ian entered, dressed in his usual performance gear and mask, head low as he made his way toward the center of the room.  

Jin looked up from where he was tying his shoes. Punctual as always, he thought. Ian had never once arrived late—and neither had they when it came to these rehearsals.  

Everyone was doing their warmups when Jin looked up again and noticed something he hadn’t really registered before.  

Taehyung was watching Ian.  

Not staring—but watching, calmly and focused.  

Ian was speaking to Hoseok about lighting cues, and Taehyung stood off to the side, arms crossed, expression neutral yet attentive. Then, as the conversation ended, Ian stepped back and adjusted his sleeves.  

Taehyung strolled over casually and offered Ian a sweat towel. It was a minor act, just a simple gesture, yet Ian accepted it, and the two exchanged a few quiet words that Jin couldn’t catch. As Ian walked away, he lightly bumped shoulders with Taehyung—a small, almost playful gesture.

Jin’s brow furrowed. That was… unexpected. He didn’t recall Ian being so relaxed during their first rehearsals together. Previously, the masked performer had seemed stiff and formal. Always polite and respectful, yet clearly maintaining a barrier.

Now, however, he appeared slightly more at ease. Still private, still quiet—but different. Jin recognized that this wasn’t the first occasion he’d noticed this change.

In recent practices, Ian had begun to linger a bit longer, engaging in more conversation and even laughing—genuinely laughing!—once or twice at something Taehyung or Jimin had said. As he glanced at Taehyung beside him, smiling effortlessly… it clicked.

Taehyung had played a role in this transformation.

Perhaps he had made Ian feel a bit more at home, a touch less protective.

It wasn’t concerning—if anything, it was impressive. Jin smiled subtly as he watched the two fall into step when Hoseok called for them to form up.

The music began. The beat dropped.

Fake Love kicked off.

The room resonated with sharp footfalls and synchronized breaths as they dove into the choreography. Jin centered on his own movements yet stole glances at Ian during their run-through. Ian’s dancing was as smooth as ever—precise, expressive, magnetic.

But once more, there was a newfound quality in how he carried himself.

Not just confidence.

Not merely mystery.

Ease.

After a few hours and numerous full run-throughs, the atmosphere was dense with heavy breaths and the sounds of limbs stretching. Everyone was panting, sweaty but content.

“Okay!” Hoseok exclaimed, clapping his hands as he reviewed the latest rehearsal video. “We’re doing fantastic! With just three weeks to go until the party, we’ve streamlined most transitions and refined the details we were uncertain about. Everything’s coming together beautifully.”

He turned to Ian, who was drying off near the mirror. “And you—seriously, Ian, great job. You really tie us all together.”

Ian let out a short, breathless laugh. “Thanks.”

Jimin nodded, wiping the sweat from his neck. “Let’s wrap it up for today. Ian, our next practice is Friday?”

“Works for me,” Jungkook replied, adjusting his mask slightly. “No club show that night, so I’m available.”

Namjoon checked his phone. “Can everyone do 3 p.m.? It’ll give us time to eat and relax a little—it is Friday after all.”

One by one, everyone nodded or gave small thumbs-up.

“Great, 3 p.m. on Friday it is,” Namjoon confirmed.

Jungkook threw his bag over his shoulder. “I’ll head out then. Got a few things to handle tonight.” He turned to the group. “Also—I agree with Hoseok-ssi. You guys always applaud me, but you’re all just as talented. I genuinely think we’re going to shine out there.”

Even behind the mask, his tone was bright.

“We will,” Namjoon replied confidently.

“Go rest, Ian. We won’t keep you any longer,” Yoongi added with a nod. “Great job, as always. See you on Friday.”

“See you Friday, Ian!” Taehyung said with a smile and a wave.

Ian flashed a peace sign before leaving through the door.

As the door clicked shut behind him, the others began gathering their belongings, chatting about food, showers, and who would cover drinks later.

Jin, however, lingered.

He approached Taehyung, casually draping a towel over his neck. “Alright, Tae,” he said, sporting a half-grin. “What’s your secret?”

Taehyung raised an eyebrow. “About what?”

Jin leaned in a bit closer, lowering his voice playfully. “About getting Ian to open up. He actually talked today. And smiled. I mean—he peace-signed us. That’s practically fan service.”

Taehyung let out a soft laugh, shrugging. “I don’t know. Maybe he’s just starting to feel more comfortable.”

Jin observed him for a moment—just a heartbeat too long. Then he smiled and nodded.

“Guess we should keep you around him more often, then,” he teased, turning away.

Taehyung chuckled, heading off to grab his bag. But as Jin trailed a few steps behind, his mind replayed the earlier exchange—the way Ian had bumped Taehyung’s arm, and how Tae had smiled as if it were nothing. 

It wasn’t suspicious. Not yet. 

But it also wasn’t nothing.

Chapter Text

“You know what I was thinking, Ggukie?”

Taehyung’s voice came lazily from beside him, where he lay stretched out on his backpack beneath the shade of a tree.

Jungkook, seated next to him and half-leaning against the trunk, didn’t look up from his phone. He was casually scrolling through social media, the faint sounds of videos and music mixing with the rustle of the afternoon breeze.

“Hmm?” he hummed, acknowledging but not glancing away.

“My class was canceled today,” Taehyung added, almost as an afterthought, “so I figured I’d catch you while you’re free. And I was thinking, what if I joined you for your next Ian performance? Like… surprise guest style.”

That made Jungkook pause. He lowered his phone, brows slightly raised as he turned to look at Taehyung properly. “You want to be my guest performer?” he asked, even though he’d heard perfectly well.

“Yes!” Taehyung grinned, pushing up on his elbows. “It’d be fun and unexpected. I think it would bring in more buzz too. Something fresh, something cool. Just a one-time thing.”

Jungkook’s lips parted, then curved into a small, unsure smile. “I mean… I like the idea. I do. But won’t that be a lot for you, hyung? With school, tutoring, party practices… it’s kind of a loaded week.”

Taehyung gave him an unamused look. “If you can juggle it all while literally leading a double life, I think I’ll survive performing one song.”

“Touche,” Jungkook chuckled, glancing down in mock defeat. “Okay, let’s do it. What do you have in mind?”

“Well,” Taehyung sat up straighter, brushing grass off his sleeve, “I wanted to hear your idea first. I figured you probably already had something planned for next week.”

Jungkook nodded. “I was leaning toward something with either a hip-hop or sensual vibe. Maybe a dance-focused performance this time. Last time was more vocal-heavy, and I try to switch it up when I can.”

“Ooh, mysterious,” Taehyung beamed. “If it’s all dance, then I can be just as secretive. No vocals means it’ll be harder for people to recognize me, right?”

Jungkook snorted.

“What was that for?” Taehyung narrowed his eyes, feigning offense.

“No offense, hyung,” Jungkook laughed, “but it’s a little naïve to think people won’t figure it out. I mean, sure, maybe a few won’t—but your fans? Your fans will know it’s you even if you show up in a mascot suit.”

Taehyung leaned back again, gaze lifted to the canopy of rustling leaves above them. “Also, what fans? You make it sound like I’m some K-pop idol or a western celebrity. I’m not.”

Jungkook gave a small laugh. “Maybe not technically. But you and the rest of the guys? You’re pretty much there already. Have you seen the fan pages? The fancams? The edits?”

Taehyung groaned, lightly tapping his fingers on his chest. “I have. But that doesn’t mean I have fans.”

“It does. You’re just modest,” Jungkook said, nudging him back. “Some people might not recognize you, sure. But with or without a mask, there’ll be a few who’ll catch on.”

Taehyung tilted his head, thoughtful. “Well… if I do get recognized, it’s fine. I’ve got nothing to hide.”

Jungkook’s smile dimmed just a little at that, fingers pausing briefly over his screen. He looked away, then back again with a quiet hum. “Right. Nothing to hide.”

The breeze shifted. For a moment, silence stretched between them, not awkward, but full of something unspoken.

“Anyway,” Taehyung clapped his hands, breaking the stillness with his usual energy. “You said it yourself, we need to pick songs. Let’s start now.”

“Yeah,” Jungkook nodded, scooting closer. “Let’s see what we can come up with.”

Both of them opened their music apps, shoulders brushing as they leaned in over their screens, occasionally playing short clips for each other and tossing out ideas. Somewhere in the calm of the afternoon, with the sun casting shifting shadows through the leaves above, a secret show began to take shape—one more step forward, and one more thread in the bond they were stitching quietly behind the mask.

Later That Evening – Jungkook’s Apartment

The soft hum of the air purifier blended into the background as Taehyung lounged sideways on Jungkook’s couch, one leg draped over the armrest and the other bouncing lightly to the rhythm of a beat playing from Jungkook’s Bluetooth speaker. Jungkook, seated on the floor with his laptop open and earbuds half hanging off, looked up at him with an amused expression.

“I still can’t believe we’re actually doing both,” Taehyung said, grinning. “'Good Boy' and 'Rainism'? It’s such a chaotic combo, but kind of perfect.”

“It’s duality,” Jungkook replied, lifting one eyebrow. “Starts cocky, ends seductive. We’re either genius or ridiculous.”

Taehyung laughed. “Definitely genius. Plus, it'll keep people guessing the entire time. Nobody will expect that flip.”

They both nodded in sync, satisfied.

Jungkook leaned back, stretching his arms with a yawn. “Alright, now the real problem. Where do we rehearse?”

Taehyung scratched his neck, thinking. “We could use the student studio at my department building. The dance majors don’t book the late-night slots as often, especially Wednesdays and Fridays. No one’s ever there after like 9.”

Jungkook tilted his head. “That could work... But we’d have to keep it on the down-low. If someone sees us prepping a full set, they’ll know it’s not just a school thing.”

“Then we just play it off,” Taehyung shrugged. “I’ll say I’m working on a solo dance piece and roped you in to help. Technically not even a lie.”

“Fair.” Jungkook smiled. “We’ll just have to make sure we don’t overlap with anyone else’s rehearsals.”

“And no sharing schedules with the others. Especially Jin-hyung. He’s too sharp,” Taehyung added, only half-joking.

Jungkook chuckled, bumping Taehyung’s foot with his hand. “You’re acting like we’re planning a heist.”

“We kinda are,” Taehyung grinned, then raised a fist. “To secrecy and synchronized body rolls?”

Jungkook rolled his eyes but bumped it. “To secrecy.”

The speaker started playing “Rainism” again as they both turned to their phones, already searching for outfit inspo and dance clips.

They had spent nearly two hours scrolling, searching, and debating potential outfit concepts for their performance, but still couldn’t settle on one.

“Maybe we should just use a random generator online,” Jungkook sighed, leaning back and rubbing his temples. “Let the algorithm decide since we clearly can’t.”

Taehyung chuckled, running his hands through his hair in mild frustration. “Honestly, at this point? That might not be the worst idea.”

He glanced at Jungkook for a moment. “Do you struggle this much when you pick your own outfits? Like… for Ian?”

Jungkook shook his head with a light laugh. “Sometimes, but not usually. I usually get a feel for what fits the vibe. But I guess every now and then I hit a wall creatively, especially when trying something new.”

Taehyung nodded. “Makes sense. Let’s just sleep on it and finalize tomorrow. The bigger priority is to start rehearsing soon anyway.”

“Agreed,” Jungkook smiled.

Just then, the doorbell rang, cutting through the conversation. Jungkook frowned slightly and stood up to check the monitor.

He peered at the small screen and blinked. “Oh, it’s Jin-hyung.”

“Really?” Taehyung perked up. “Well, let him in.”

“Obviously. But… what do we say?” Jungkook whispered, a flicker of nervousness passing through him.

Taehyung stayed relaxed. “He’s already seen us spending more time together. It won’t be strange. We’ll just stick to the usual story. Besides, he always loves seeing you open up to the rest of us.”

Jungkook exhaled. “Right… okay.”

He pressed the intercom. “You know my passcode, hyung. Why are you even ringing? You normally just walk in.”

“Ya brat,” Jin’s voice came through with playful annoyance. “I wasn’t sure you were home, okay? Plus, I’m trying to be courteous for once. Just open up! I brought food, and there’s plenty.”

Jungkook laughed as he unlocked the door.

“Finally,” Jin said as he stepped inside, slipping off his shoes and exchanging them for the house slippers. Jungkook grabbed the takeout bags and peeked inside with excitement.

“Ooh, fried chicken,” he grinned.

“Only the best for my youngest,” Jin beamed proudly.

As Jin walked into the living room, he paused mid-step, slightly caught off guard to see Taehyung already there.

“Taehyung?!” Jin blinked. “I didn’t know you were here.”

“Hi, hyung!” Taehyung greeted with a grin. “Lucky timing for me, right? You brought dinner.”

Jin let out a small laugh but couldn’t help raising his brow. “Wait, Jungkook invited you?”

He turned slightly, calling louder so Jungkook could hear from the kitchen: “You invited Taehyung? Look at you, finally opening up more!”

Jungkook chuckled from the kitchen but didn’t comment.

Taehyung smoothly filled the silence, giving his explanation with a calm ease. “Well, kind of. I actually texted him earlier. I wanted to go over some of the material for the next tutoring session, we’re starting that new section soon, and since I’m teaching it this time, I figured I’d run through it with Jungkook. He’s honestly better than me at this stuff anyway.”

He added casually, “Jimin couldn’t join since he has that family thing today, so figured I’d get ahead a bit.”

Everything Taehyung said was carefully crafted—a mix of truth and convenient omission. It slid by easily, without raising any red flags out loud.

Jin smiled warmly, though a quiet thought tucked itself into the back of his mind:

They didn’t mention they were meeting earlier when I asked about plans today… but maybe I forgot.

“Very responsible of you,” Jin said, dropping it as easily as it arrived.

“Anyways let’s go eat! I’m hungry!” Jungkook yelled from his dining table and kitchen. Jin laughed and with Taehyung together went to the dining room. 

“Didn’t you eat? “ Jin asked sitting down at one of the seats. 

Jungkook sits across from him and nods, “I did, but you know how I am with food!” Jungkook scrunched and this time Taehyung laughed. 

As they began to eat the chicken, talk and laugh. Jin couldn’t help but notice the ease between them. The way Taehyung instinctively slid the dipping sauce Jungkook always liked closer to him. The way they fell into a private rhythm of inside jokes and shared glances.

Nothing strange.

Nothing wrong.

But… a little different than before.

You two really have gotten close lately, Jin thought quietly.

And while it made him happy on the surface, a tiny flicker of curiosity lit somewhere deeper beneath.

After dinner, Jin excused himself not long after. He left with a wave, teasing Jungkook one last time about “finally being social,” and telling Taehyung to text him the new tutoring schedule when he had time.

The apartment door shut with a soft click, and Jungkook let out a quiet breath as he leaned against the counter.

“That was close,” he muttered.

Taehyung, lounging again on the couch, only hummed. “I told you he wouldn’t think much of it. Jin hyung trusts us.”

Jungkook nodded, but his brows were still pinched slightly. “Yeah… but he’s sharp. He notices everything. Even the way I eat chicken.”

Taehyung laughed.

“Okay, that’s just because you eat chicken like a starving puppy.”

“Shut up,” Jungkook grinned despite himself, tossing a napkin at him.

The room quieted again, but this time with a more thoughtful kind of calm. Jungkook wandered over, picking up one of the outfit sketches from earlier that they’d left strewn across the coffee table.

“So… Friday?” he asked.

“Yeah,” Taehyung confirmed, already pulling up the schedule on his phone. “Late enough so no one asks where we are. If we prep the studio ahead of time, we can get at least two hours in before curfew.”

Jungkook nodded. “Let’s just not run into anyone on the way out this time.”

And that’s how Taehyung and Jungkook found themselves doing that Friday night, a few hours after having a tutoring session with others. Thankfully, the session had been much earlier in the day, and everyone else had individual plans, so no alarms were raised for either of them.

They had enough time to relax and get ready to head to the dance studio that Taehyung had booked.

“You know, I can’t believe I’ll finally get to see you practice as Jungkook,” Taehyung commented as they both warmed up with stretches. “Like, you won’t have any mask on or anything.”

“Why? Still hard to believe that I’m Ian?” Jungkook asked in return.

“Yes, but not in the way you might think,” Taehyung said. “I don’t mean it in a undermining or judging way. I mean, like…” Taehyung paused for a moment, trying to find the right words without offending Jungkook.

Jungkook laughed as he saw Taehyung deeply contemplating how to avoid offending him. Though Jungkook understood what Taehyung meant, it was fun to see how Taehyung found a way to express what Jungkook already knew he intended. 

It’s more like watching two versions of the same person finally overlap. You’re still you—just… fuller, somehow. Like this is the version that doesn’t hide to protect himself.”

Jungkook blinked, caught off guard by the sincerity.

“Damn, hyung,” he said softly. “You always find a way to say it right after all.”

Taehyung smiled, relieved. “Well, I try.”

“Wonder how the others will react once they find out…” Jungkook said aloud, not intending to share his thoughts.  

“I’m sure they’ll be supportive,” Taehyung replied almost immediately.  

“Honestly, Jungkook, I believe everyone will respond with positivity when they learn that Ian is you. They might not be surprised by your talent, but they will definitely be intrigued by who you are. It just seems fitting that you are Ian.”  

“But they’ve never seen me perform or anything. How would they know it’s a good match?” Jungkook inquired, knowing the truth behind his concern. How could they possibly see him as Ian when the only artistic side of Jungkook they had witnessed was in visual art, not in performance?

Taehyung nodded slowly, his expression thoughtful.

“That’s true… they haven’t seen you perform, as Jungkook that is,” he admitted. “Not really. But they’ve seen you. They’ve seen how much you feel everything. How you’re quiet, but intense. How you pay attention to details no one else notices. How you move when you think no one’s watching.”

He paused, then smiled softly.

“I think when they find out, it’ll just click. Like, ‘Of course he’s Ian. Who else could pull that off?’”

Jungkook looked down, fiddling with the hem of his shirt. “But what if it doesn’t? What if they see it and… it just doesn’t add up for them? What if they think it’s too different from who I am with them?”

“Then that’s on them,” Taehyung said gently, but firmly. “But I don’t think they will. You’re not pretending to be someone else when you’re Ian, you’re letting the rest of yourself show. And I think they’ll respect that. I really do.”

There was a quiet beat between them.

Then Jungkook looked up. “And if they don’t?”

Taehyung tilted his head. “Then they’ll need time. Just like you needed time to let them in. Just like you’re still learning to let yourself be seen.”

Jungkook blinked again, the words hitting deeper than he expected. His lips parted slightly, then curved into a small, unsure smile.

But really… I don’t think it’ll be different,” he said. “I know them. All of them. And yeah, they can be loud, chaotic, and sometimes oblivious, but they’re also loyal. Honest. And when they care, they really care.”

He leaned back on his palms, exhaling slowly.

“They’ve never seen you dance, sure. But they’ve seen your heart. They’ve seen how much you give, even when it’s quiet. Even when you think no one notices.”

Jungkook looked down again, expression soft but unreadable.

Taehyung smiled faintly. “They’ll understand. I really believe that. Maybe not all at once, and maybe they’ll be shocked for a second. But deep down? I think they’ll feel proud. That you were brave enough to show this side of yourself, even if it took time.”

Jungkook sat with that in silence for a beat. Then, with a barely-there nod, he murmured, “I hope you’re right.”

Taehyung bumped his knee against Jungkook’s gently. “I am. And when the time comes, you won’t be facing it alone.”

Jungkook glanced at him, and this time, his smile reached his eyes.

“Okay, okay, enough of this sentimental stuff,” Taehyung teased lightly, standing up and stretching. “You’re gonna make me cry before we even start rehearsal.”

Jungkook laughed, shaking his head. “You started it.”

“Fair enough,” Taehyung grinned. “Now let’s see what Ian can do...without the mask.”

Jungkook stood, pulling his hoodie off and cracking his knuckles. “You’re not ready.”

Taehyung smirked. “Try me.”

With that they had started to go over choreography detaille and plans. Taehyung smiling and having fun through it all just like Jungkook. 

However for Taehyung, it was amazing to see Jungkook dancing and moving like Ian did. It made it all more believable and different too.

He liked it better too. He liked dancing and watching Jungkook perform without any mask because it made everything more real and true. 

They practiced and created something for four hours and ran through it once slowly by the end. They decided after to call it a day. 

“Gosh that was tiring but so good!  Looks, like we have the base down!” Taehyung smiled as he flopped onto the floor tired. 

Jungkook who was panting and wiping the sweat off with a towel, “it was! We've been very productive!” he sat down. 

“I think we will be able to nail everything down in a few days,” he continued his comment. 

“Oh we will! No one is going to be ready for us this weekend,” Taehyung with the utmost confident speaks as he sits up and they laugh. 

They let some silence settle the room for a second. Not an awkward one but one where they let themselves settle how tired they are. 

“…I like this version of you better,” Taehging said once breaking the silence. 

Jungkook blinked, tilting his head. “Huh?”

Taehyung smiled faintly. “You. Dancing like this. No mask. It’s more you. And I don’t think the mystery ever mattered as much as you thought it did.”

“…I like this version of you better.”

Jungkook blinked, sweat still glistening on his forehead as his chest rose and fell. “Huh?”

Taehyung smiled, voice softer this time. “You. Dancing like this. No mask. It’s more you. And I don’t think the mystery ever mattered as much as you thought it did.”

Jungkook let out a small scoff, looking away as he reached for his water bottle. “You’re so dramatic sometimes,” he muttered, though the faint color rising in his cheeks gave him away.

Taehyung didn’t reply. He just watched him quietly, letting the moment settle.

Jungkook took a long sip, then sat down on the floor with a sigh, back leaning against the mirror. His voice dropped slightly.

“…But really?” he asked, not looking at Taehyung just yet. “You liked it more like this?”

Taehyung nodded without hesitation. “Yeah. I did.”

Jungkook paused, his fingers fidgeting with the label on his water bottle.

“…That somehow makes me glad,” he said at last, voice soft.

“I hope someday I’ll feel the same. That I like this version more too, like others might. I’m not there yet, but I’ll get there.” He added a bit of enthusiasm at the end, trying to believe it out loud.

Taehyung gave him a bright, reassuring smile. “I know you will, Jungkookie. No doubt about it.”

Jungkook smiled back, small, but real.

“Well,” he said, standing and stretching his arms over his head, “we better start getting ready to head out. It’s late, and I’m tired. I could use a nap.”

Taehyung stood as well, grabbing his bag. “Same here. Once I get home and shower, I’m crashing hard.”

Jungkook chuckled. “For me, it depends. I’ll shower first, then either nap, eat… or fall asleep mid-nap and accidentally time-travel to the next day.”

Taehyung laughed as they walked toward the door. “Iconic.”

“Same time in two days?” he asked as they reached their shoes.

“Yeah. Two days, same place,” Jungkook nodded with a smile.

“Let’s rock it then, Jungkookie.” Taehyung clapped a hand on his shoulder, and they exchanged a high five.

This rehearsal had been a first in many ways...raw, honest, unmasked. But it hadn’t been scary. And that made Jungkook feel… content. Maybe even a little hopeful.

Later that night, as Jungkook stepped out of the shower, towel drying his hair and padding softly into the dim quiet of his apartment, his mind wandered back to practice.

It had been fun, more than he expected.

Not just because of the dancing, but because for once, he hadn’t needed to be “Ian.” He didn’t need to monitor his tone, posture, or every expression. He just… moved. Breathed. Laughed.

And Taehyung hadn’t flinched at the real version of him. If anything, he seemed to enjoy it more.

Jungkook found himself smiling faintly as he sat on the edge of his bed, water bottle in hand, replaying little flashes—the way Taehyung matched his energy without making it feel like pressure, the way he’d cheered instead of critiqued.

It made him curious…

Would the others feel the same, too?

Would they like this version of him, the one without filters and masks?

Would they recognize him?

He wasn’t sure yet. But the thought didn’t feel as terrifying tonight.

Just… possible.

Suddenly, his phone rang, pulling him out of his thoughts. Jungkook glanced at the screen. It was his brother. A tired smile tugged at his lips as he swiped to answer and flopped onto the bed.

“Sup, hyung,” he greeted.

“Still up, huh? I wasn’t sure you’d answer this late,” came Junghyun’s familiar voice. “But here you are.”

“I just showered, actually,” Jungkook said, running a hand through his damp hair. “Had a late dance practice. But don’t worry, I’ll sleep after we talk.” He chuckled softly at the end.

“You better. Anyway, I figured I’d call since your texts have been pretty dry lately.” Junghyun’s tone turned teasing. “So, how’s everything? Classes? Jin-hyung? And how’s it going being Ian? I saw the club’s socials—your numbers are climbing again. And wait… how’s it been practicing with Jin and the others? Still keeping your identity a secret?”

Jungkook groaned lightly, grabbing his AirPods and slipping them in, already bracing for what was clearly going to be a long conversation.

“That’s a lot of questions, hyung.”

“You’ll survive,” Junghyun laughed.

Jungkook exhaled and settled deeper into the mattress. “Things have been busy, but good. School’s fine. I’m getting decent grades and actually enjoying most of my classes this semester.”

He paused briefly before continuing. “Jin-hyung’s doing great. Still dramatic, still overly caring. You know how he is—one text if I’m five minutes late to something.”

Junghyun snorted. “Sounds like him.”

“As for Ian stuff… honestly? It’s been amazing. Each time I perform, it feels like this burst of magic. Even though I’ve been performing less than before—because of school, tutoring, and dance practice—I still do bi-weekly shows. And they’ve been going really well.”

“That’s awesome,” Junghyun replied. “I knew you’d find your rhythm.”

Jungkook smiled faintly, then continued. “And practicing with the others… it’s been fun. Really fun. We blend surprisingly well. The songs are solid—eye-catching, like they’re meant to surprise people. Some of the vocals are hard as hell, but we’re managing.”

He hesitated. “That said… I’ve still been careful. You know, trying to make sure none of them find out I’m Ian. But…”

He trailed off.

“But what?” Junghyun asked sharply. “Wait, did someone find out? Did you tell someone?!”

Jungkook winced and laughed nervously. “No, no. I didn’t tell anyone. But….” He stopped. 

“Don’t tell me someone found out already?” Junghyun’s voice sharpened with concern. “Was it Jin? Or… all of them?”

Jungkook shook his head, even though his brother couldn’t see him. “No, Jin still doesn’t know I’m Ian. Just one of the hyungs found out… Taehyung.”

“What? How?”

“I didn’t tell him directly. Let’s just say… I need to be more careful about how the staff address me off-stage,” Jungkook sighed, rubbing the back of his neck.

“I had just finished a performance, and like always, the staff congratulated me. But this time, instead of saying ‘Great job, Ian,’ they used my real name. And just my luck—Taehyung happened to be in the club that night with some friends. He was walking over to say hi or something right as they said it.”

“Oof,” Junghyun muttered.

“Yeah,” Jungkook agreed. “And to make it worse, I’d already taken off my mask. Still had the same stage clothes on too. There was no way to talk my way out of it.”

“So, you had to come clean.”

“I did. I explained everything.” He let out a small breath. “It turned out okay, though. Taehyung’s been… great, actually. Supportive.” 

“He’s been helping me keep it a secret, or at least helping me avoid getting caught,” Jungkook said, his voice softer now. “We’ve gotten closer since he found out. I mean, I always knew we had things in common. I have things in common with all of them—but you don’t really see how much until you spend real time with someone. I’m more comfortable around him now. The others too, but… since he knows, it’s just easier.”

He trailed off, but Junghyun caught the unspoken meaning.

“I get it, don’t worry,” his brother reassured. “So… he’s okay with not telling anyone?”

“He is. I explained everything to him. I even told him he didn’t have to help me hide it—that it wasn’t fair to ask that of him. But he insisted. Said it wasn’t his secret to tell, and that he’d never betray that.” Jungkook sighed, running a hand through his hair. “Still… I can’t help feeling guilty. Like I’m putting him in a tough spot, lying to the others.”

There was a beat of silence before Junghyun spoke again. “Well, if he knows them well and says there’s nothing to worry about, then maybe trust that. I’m glad he’s helping you—and honestly, I’m really glad you’re getting closer to all of them. Especially Taehyung.”

Jungkook smiled faintly at his brother’s warmth.

“Just to be clear, though,” Junghyun continued with a slightly teasing but curious tone, “when you say he’s helping… you mean like helping you keep the secret and giving advice, not, you know, giving you a boost or pushing your performances unfairly, right?”

Jungkook chuckled. “That’s right. Nothing like that.”

“We’re actually working on a duo performance for the club this Friday,” he explained. “He’s going to wear a mask too, so people don’t recognize him. I told him they still might, but he doesn’t care.”

Junghyun raised a brow through the phone. “He’s brave.”

“He just wants to perform for fun, before our big group one. And honestly… it has been fun,” Jungkook admitted.

 “Hiding it hasn’t even been a hassle, not with him. It’s the first time I’ve been able to enjoy this without all the stress.”

Junghyun chuckled, clearly relieved. “Wow. I gotta admit, that’s pretty cool of him. Risking recognition just to support you—says a lot about the kind of person he is.”

Jungkook hummed in agreement.

“And honestly,” his brother added, “I’m proud of you too, Jungkook. Not just for pulling this whole double life off—which is wild, by the way—but for finally letting someone in. You’ve always been so guarded. I know that came from wanting to protect yourself, but… it’s nice to hear that someone else sees what I’ve always seen in you.”

Jungkook blinked, caught off guard by the warmth in his hyung’s voice.

“Thanks,” he murmured.

“Don’t get soft on me now,” Junghyun teased. “But really, it sounds like you’re finding your people. Slowly. Naturally. And that’s all I’ve ever wanted for you.”

Jungkook bit back a smile. “You’re getting all sentimental now.”

“You brought it out of me, kid,” Junghyun joked. “Anyway, don’t overthink the guilt too much, alright? Just keep being honest with yourself. Secrets are one thing—but the moment something feels too heavy, you’ll know when it’s time to tell them. And from the sound of it, Taehyung won’t let you carry it alone.”

“Yeah,” Jungkook whispered, more to himself than his brother. “He really won’t.”

Junghyun let a pause hang in the air before slyly adding, “You know… I can’t help but wonder. If it had been Jin who found out… wouldn’t he have done the same?”

Jungkook furrowed his brows. “What do you mean?”

“I mean,” Junghyun continued smoothly, “you didn’t tell Jin because you wanted to do this all on your own. To prove something to yourself, sure, but maybe also to him. To show him, ‘Look, I pulled this off without anyone’s help.’ Even though… you never really had anything to prove to him in the first place.”

Jungkook stayed quiet, his fingers tightening slightly around his water bottle.

“But what if Jin wouldn’t have tried to stop you? Or overshadow you? What if he would’ve reacted like Taehyung did—just… quietly supported you, no questions, no ego, no rescue missions. Just pride?”

Jungkook exhaled slowly. “I… I don’t know.”

“You assumed Jin would rush in and try to carry it for you. Maybe he would’ve,” Junghyun said gently. “But maybe not. You won’t really know until it happens, will you?”

Jungkook bit the inside of his cheek, unsure what to say. The idea poked at something he hadn’t let himself think too deeply about.

“I guess… I didn’t want to risk it. Not with him. Not yet,” Jungkook admitted, voice low. “If he saw me struggle too early, I think I would’ve lost the confidence to keep going.”

Junghyun hummed. “Fair. But maybe don’t box him in just yet. Sometimes the people we’re scared to disappoint end up being the ones who surprise us the most.”

Jungkook let out a small, dry laugh. “So… is this your way of telling me I should hurry up and tell Jin?”

Junghyun didn’t hesitate. “Well. I wasn’t going to say it like that. But now that you did…”

Jungkook sighed, rubbing his face with both hands before letting them fall to his chest. “Hyung…”

“I’m just saying,” Junghyun pressed gently, “you clearly trust Taehyung. You let him in. That’s huge. But Jin? He’s practically your other half, even if you don’t like admitting it out loud.”

“I know,” Jungkook said softly. “I know that.”

He looked up at the ceiling, his voice quieter now.

“I won’t lie… these last few weeks, it’s been getting harder. Hiding it. Especially from him. I didn’t think it would hit me like this, but… I feel it. I really do. Like every time he praises Ian or says something about the performances, I feel like I’m lying to him. And I hate that.”

Junghyun didn’t speak immediately, letting Jungkook’s words settle between them.

“Then maybe it’s not about rushing,” he said eventually. “Maybe it’s just… about not dragging it out until it starts hurting more than it helps.”

That landed hard. Jungkook blinked slowly, then closed his eyes.

“Yeah… I think I’m starting to feel that point coming,” he admitted quietly.

Junghyun’s voice softened. “Hey… look. You’re doing something really brave, Jungkook. Not just performing, but doing it on your own terms. I get why you’ve been cautious—why you wanted to prove it to yourself first. That doesn’t make you a bad person.”

Jungkook swallowed. “I just hate feeling like I’m keeping something from him when I’ve always told him everything.”

“I know,” Junghyun said. “But you’re not trying to hurt him. You’re just trying to figure yourself out. He’d understand that. And when you’re ready… he’ll be proud of you. So proud, Kook.”

A brief silence settled between them, not uncomfortable—just thoughtful. Jungkook exhaled, voice quieter now.

“It just came to mind,” he said, his fingers tracing patterns along the blanket. “And I’m not sure, but… maybe after the performance party. That might be the right time to tell him.”

“Oh?” Junghyun’s tone lifted with interest. “Why then?”

Jungkook thought for a moment, then replied, “Because… I want him to see it. I want him to feel what I’ve been doing. Not just hear it from me. I want him to watch, like everyone else, and realize it’s me… that I’m capable. That I’ve grown. And then…after that—I want to tell him everything.”

Junghyun hummed softly, a quiet thread of warmth in his voice. “That sounds like the right way for you. And that’s what matters. Just don’t let guilt be the thing that decides it—let it be pride.”

Jungkook closed his eyes, letting those words settle in deep.

“Thanks, hyung,” he said genuinely. “For saying that.”

“Always, Kook. You’ve got this.”

After they hung up, Jungkook stayed lying on his back, phone resting on his chest, eyes fixed on the ceiling.

The room was quiet now—just the faint hum of the heater and the low city sounds filtering through his window. Yet inside, his thoughts were loud. Messy. Circular.

He’d said it lightly on the call—“Maybe after the performance party.” But now, in the stillness, the weight of it really settled in.

Because maybe it was time.

The group performance was coming up. Ian, he, would be on stage, not solo this time, but as one of them. With the others. With Jin. And it would be the first time Jin ever saw him perform.

Not draw. Not tutor. Not cook beside him in the kitchen or joke at 2 a.m.—but perform.

Truly perform.

And wasn’t that the whole reason he hadn’t told Jin from the start? Not out of mistrust, but because he wanted Jin to see him first. Without the tilt of brotherly pride or easy encouragement. Jungkook wanted to prove that he could stand on his own before stepping forward.

But lately… it didn’t feel noble anymore. It felt a little unfair.

Unfair to Jin, who had always been there. Who asked nothing in return but honesty.

And maybe unfair to himself too, for still carrying the pressure of needing to “earn” someone’s belief in him.

Jungkook turned onto his side, curling slightly. His mind still buzzed, but it was softer now. Less panicked. More… certain.

If things went well, if the party and performance felt right—then maybe that would be the moment. The one he’d been waiting for.

To finally say, “Hyung… it was me. It’s been me all along.”

Jungkook exhaled slowly, gaze unfocused as he stared out at nothing.

I’ll do it after.

No more maybes. No more waiting for the perfect moment to fall into his lap.

After the performance… I’ll tell him.

No matter how Jin reacts—whether he laughs, gets mad, or just stares at him in disbelief—Jungkook knew he had to come clean. Not because he was caught. Not because anyone pushed him. But because it was time. Because Jin deserved that.

Still…

Jungkook pressed his lips together, jaw tightening faintly.

I just hope… he doesn’t get too upset when I do.

Because deep down, no matter how much he wanted to stand on his own, part of him still wanted Jin to understand.

To see him.

And to be proud—even if he’d done it all in secret.

Saturday Night — Jin’s Apartment

The soft hum of the night played in the background—crickets outside, low jazz on his speakers—as Jin leaned back on his couch, thumb lazily scrolling through his phone. It had been a long week, and mindless browsing was all his brain could handle.

But then something stopped him mid-scroll.

A new post from the university’s dance club account flashed across his screen, bold and polished:

✨ This weekend, Ian returns to the stage with a never-before-seen special guest. Don’t miss it. ✨

Friday | 8PM | Club Showcase Hall

#MaskedLegend #IanReturns #WhoIsIt

Jin sat up a little straighter.

A guest performer? With Ian?

He raised an eyebrow. That was… unusual. Ian never shared the stage. Never broke his pattern. Never gave the impression he wanted anyone near the spotlight with him. That’s what made him fascinating. Yes, Ian had accepted to share the stage with them, but still. 

Now this?

Jin reread the caption twice, the faint crease between his brows deepening. He couldn’t say exactly why, but something about it tugged at a corner of his thoughts he hadn’t explored in a while.

He stared at the screen for a few more seconds, then quietly saved the post.

Not because he was suspicious.

Just… curious.

Really curious.